1,115,108
* -º
º
, s
‘. . .ºs 3. …s.,.
Cº- *º:
*ś
º;
:
º
º
º
ºf

U
}
Presented by
|
(*--> * > . . .” --> f -ºx f_2 ; ºr: A - - -] 2 / ...T. z-----
GENERAL LIBRARY
OF
University of Michigan

EX E R C ISES
IN
SOME OF THE MORE DIFFICUIT PRINCIPLES
- } ſ) / f .* }- ?
/ J , () -- .
|
OF ** -
GREEK SYNTAX :
WITH R E FE RE NO ES
TO THE GRAMMARS OF CROSBY, CURTIUS, GOODWIN, HADLEY,
KOCH, AND KüHNER.
A SEQUEL TO
JONESS EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION,
AND
IAWTENDED FOR THE FIRST YEAR TW COLLEGE.
BY
JAMES R. BOISE, Ph.D.,
PROFESS OR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CHIC A G O .
C H H C A G O :
S. C. G R T G G S A N D C O M P A NY.
1874.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1874,
BY S. C. GRIGGS & CO.,
in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
UNIvERSITY PRESS : WELCH, BIGELow, & Co.,
CAMBRIDGE,
TO
THE HON. J. Y. SCAMMON, LL.D.,
PRESIDENT OF THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO,
**
THE PUBLIC-SPIRITED CITIZEN, AND THE GENEROUS PATRON
OF LEARNING,
. (This Qāgrk is ſºngcribed
AS A TOKEN OF HIGH RESPECT AND OF GRATITUDE
FOR MANY FAVORS,
BY THE AUTHOR.
P. R. E. F. A. C. E.
THE following exercises were prepared as a second part
to Jones's Greek Prose Composition. Consequently, much
of the knowledge which the learner has had an opportunity
to acquire in the study of that work is here presupposed.
Many grammatical references and explanations are omitted
which would be in place in a more elementary work. The
student, before entering college, has learned to use his
grammar, and knows where to find the leading topics. It
is better for him that he should begin, at least, to examine
points on which he is doubtful by the aid of his own judg-
ment, without too much assistance either from his exercise-
book or from his teacher; and if he will provide himself
with several of the grammars referred to at the beginning
of each lesson and consult them carefully, comparing the
statements of different writers on the same point, he will
find it very greatly to his advantage. I know of no way
in which he can more rapidly and surely build up the most
complete and thorough scholarship.
The grammars to which references are made are all well
known in this country, except that of Koch. I have found
this work of so much value in my own studies, that I have
made references to it for the benefit of those who read Ger-
man; thinking, also, that I may possibly some day translate
it for the use of those who do not read German.
vi FREFACE.
The examples which precede each exercise have been
selected with a good deal of care. The larger number are
taken from Demosthenes and Plato, a less number from
Xenophon, a few from Thucydides, and a very few from
other sources; all of them, however, from Attic writers.
These examples cannot be studied too carefully nor imi-
tated too closely. If the teacher, at the beginning of each
lesson, would pronounce them, slowly and distinctly, clause
by clause, and have the entire class translate in concert, it
would prove a most useful exercise. -
The special vocabularies in each lesson are quite full;
and often words that have been previously used are re-
peated. Yet no attempt has been made to give a full
account of each word in every place where it occurs; and
frequent reference to the general vocabulary at the end of
the book, also to the grammar and lexicon, will be indis-
pensable.
The oral exercises are intended to illustrate the princi-
ples of each lesson as sharply and briefly as possible.
These, also, as well as the examples, may be recited by the
whole class in concert, while the teacher pronounces, some-
times the Greek, sometimes the English. It is hoped that
these oral exercises will prove to be a feature of much
value ; yet the teacher should pass over them rapidly, with
as much life as possible, and guard most carefully against
occupying too much time in the preliminary work before
entering on the principal exercise which is to be written
on the blackboard. It is important for this last exercise
that the class-room contain large and convenient black-
boards.
The number of lessons is limited to thirty. This num-
ber is thought to contain as much work of this character
as the average Freshman class in an American college
PREFACE. vii
now requires. I should not recommend more than one
lesson each week in this work; and if the teacher would
take some pains to dwell on the particular grammatical
principles of each lesson beforehand, in connection with
the other lessons of the week, this plan would give more
unity and thoroughness to the entire work of the class.
In the examination of sentences which have been cor-
rectly written on the blackboard, the teacher is often in-
terrupted and sometimes perplexed by the question, May
not that sentence be written so and so that is, in some
other way than the one which has just been approved.
This question generally proceeds from one or more of the
best Scholars in the class. It may be answered, once for
all, in the affirmative. Nearly every sentence in the entire
work may be expressed in several different ways, with a
change of words and a change in the arrangement. It is
not, however, recommended in general to ascertain in how
many different ways a sentence may be expressed, but what
is the best form of expression ; and in order to determine
this point the examples preceding each exercise are the
best possible guide. -
In the preparation of this work, valuable assistance has
been rendered by Professor John C. Freeman, and by my
daughter, Mrs. Alice Boise Wood; both of whom have, for
Some years past, been engaged in teaching Greek in this
University. -
These lessons have been prepared in the midst of en-
grossing professional labors, with their attendant distrac-
tions and interruptions. While I do not ask that the work
shall pass for more than it is worth, I solicit for it on the
part of the teachers of the country the same charitable .
consideration which they have accorded to all my previous
Works, “Amid so many risks of going wrong, it will be
viii w PREFACE.
marvellous, indeed, if I have in all cases gone right. My
eye may have slipped over errors; my judgment, over
graver faults.”
I cannot close without expressing my thanks to the
University Press of Cambridge, Mass., for the pains taken
to Secure typographical beauty and accuracy; and above
all, to my publishers, Messrs. S. C. Griggs & Co. of this
city, for their determination to spare no effort and no ex-
pense to offer one of the best printed school-books to the
American public. I should be fully satisfied if the subject-
matter might prove worthy of So beautiful a dress. -
JAMES R. BOISE.
UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, March, 1874.
C O N T E N T S.
PAGE
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE . ... xi
EXPLANATION OF THE PRINCIPAL ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS
WORK . gº & & & g wº & & & xviii
LESSON I. — SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE TENSES OF THE IN-
DICATIVE g e & g fe g gº * jº ... 1
* LESSON II. — TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS . de tº 5
LESSON III. – THE MOODS.
Final and Object Clauses after va, Ös, 6traſs, gift . d e ... 8
LESSON IV. —THE Moops (Continued).
..Conditional Sentences tº ſe * tº e * & . 12
LESSON W. — THE MooDs (continued).
Conditional Sentences (continued) . . . tº dº tº . 16
LESSON VI. — THE MooDs (continued).
Conditional Sentences (continued) o gº © tº & . 20
LESSON VII. — THE MooDs (continued).
Conditional Sentences in Indirect Discourse & e g . 24
LESSON VIII. — MooDs IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES 28
LESSON IX. — Moods IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES
(continºſed) . & & tº fe tº & º g . 32
LESSON X. — MOODS IN THE ExPRESSION OF A WISH . º 36
LESSON XI. — MooDS IN ExFIORTATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS . 40
LESSON XII. – THE INFINITIVE ſº * e fº . ſº 44
LESSON XIII. — THE INFINITIVE (continued) tº tº tº . 48
X
CONTENTS.
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
LESSON
XIV. — THE INFINITIVE (continued) . © *
XV. — THE INFINITIVE (continued) . gº & &
XVI. — THE PARTICIPLE tº Ç g dº & º
XVII. — THE PARTICIPLE (continued)
XVIII. – THE PARTICIPLE (continued) .
XIX. — THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
XX. — THE Patricine (comtinued)
XXI. — THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
XXII. –VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN réos AND réov
XXIII. — INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
XXIV. — NEGATIVES
XXV. — NEGATIVES (continued).
XXVI. — TWO OR wome NEGATIVES IN ONE SENTENCE
XXVII. — SOME NEGATIVE PHRASES
XXVIII. — PRINCIPAL USES OF Ös, &a Tep, Öate
XXIX. — THE PRINCIPAL ILLATIVE CONJUNCTIONS
XXX. — THE PRINCIPAL INTENSIVE PARTICLES
AN ENGLISH – GREEK WOCABULARY
53
57
61
65
69
73
78
82
86
90
94
98
102
106
111
116
122
129
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN AN ATTIC
PROSE SENTENCE.
I. THE COMMON ORDER.
A. Simple Sentence.
1. THE subject stands first ; the predicate (whether a verb
alone, or eival with substantive or adjective) stands last. The
attributive follows the subject, the object precedes the predicate;
e.g. Köpos, 6 3a a txe ôs: Paxios Ep a to k\e ióov, Kopi v6 tos yévos,
Phalius a son of Eratoclides, a Corinthian by birth: oi Kepkupaio,
Tº v i ke retav oëk éðéćavro, the Corcyraeans did not receive the
petition.
2. When several object-clauses belong to one verb, the prin-
cipal object stands next before the verb; the other objects pre-
cede this, the One most intimately connected with the principal
object next to it, then the others according to the degree of their
connection with the principal object ; e. g. of "EX\mves toºs IIép-
o as évíkmarau : oi "EAAmves év M apa 66 vt to Ös II Špo as évíkmorav; oi
"EX\mves Tatti, Tā āp ép q Év M apa 66 vt Tots II &p or as évíkmorav.
3. An adverb of place or of time commonly precedes an ob-
ject in the form of a substantive, with or without a preposition
(Tóre or raúrm Ti, in épa toûs IIéporas évíkmorav): the person pre-
cedes the thing ; the dative, the accusative (Töv Tató a rºw yp ap-
p at t < jv Štědoko : Tó T a völ 8, 8X to v Štěopt): the adverb of time
precedes the adverb of place (Táte or Taºrm Tä fin pa & v Map a-
66 vt Tois II. evikmaav); an adverb of manner, however, commonly
stands directly before the verb, even between the principal ob-
ject and the verb; e.g. of "EXAmves raûrn rā àpépg éu Mapatóvº Tots
IIéporas ka? 6s évíkmorav.
xii ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS
B. Compound Sentence.
Subordinate clauses in general follow the Order of those words,
whether substantive, adjective, or adverb, in place of which they
logically stand ; e. g. 6 6vpopós, ò o Tep e i 66et it a koče º v, eite
repuévetv. The porter, the one who was accustomed to be in at-
tendance, bade us wait. ‘O 6e Kūpos, év ć ovve Aé yout o, 66ero.
Yet subordinate substantive sentences, even when they express
the grammatical subject, usually stand after the verb ; e. g. Aéyet
* * y
ôt t #&e i : intovía fiv Št t àye i Tp 5s 3a o ºxéa.
II. INVERTED ORDER.
A. Simple Sentence.
1. In the inverted order, the predicate precedes the subject;
and the attributive, the substantive to which it belongs; e.g. 'ev
péoºp yap #6m kett at Taita rā āya 6& 36A a dya 66 s 6 divip: 6
£8 a 0 tº e i s Kūpos: Tijs dipet fis Tó KáAAos. On the Order hand, in
the inverted Order, the object stands after the predicate, and the
adverb after the word which it qualifies; e. g. Ezretój Še émü6ovro
oi Kepkvpatot tº v Tapao kev fiv: duðpeios Táv v : 3extious troX w.
2. When special attention is to be drawn to the subject, it
stands last ; e. g. TaüTöv plot #öočav čxetu äuäpt'nua, Öſtep kai oi troum-
tai, kal oi d'y a 6 oi Ömp to vpy ot. The good artisans also seemed
to me to have the same fault as the poets. When two words
are to be made prominent in a sentence, one of them stands first,
the other last ; e. g. Aetºrovo i ö) kai Tôv \64.ov of itſ reis.
3. In general, the first and the last places in a sentence are
to be regarded as emphatic, when they are occupied by words
which do not regularly belong there ; e. g. obôap 6 s éyò Tpoôé-
ôoka tº v e is ip as et vot av, in no manner have I abandoned good-
will towards you. The common grammatical order would be,
3 M w 2 e * >y 3 gº g
éyò Tiju eis ipas eiſuotav ověapós Tpoôéðaka.
B. Compound Sentence.
1. In the subordinate clauses, inversion is very frequent,
Owing to various causes, – emphasis, perspicuity, euphony, and
the connection of the sentence with what precedes and follows.
IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE, xiii
Thus declarative sentences and final sentences often precede the
governing verb ; and relative sentences, those containing the an-
tecedent. *
2. When a word belonging to a subordinate sentence is to be
made specially prominent, it may precede the conjunction or the
relative which would regularly begin the sentence ; e.g. eiðéval
ôé xpi ..., k Töv pey to to v kvv8'ſ vov Šti kai . . . péytotal Tipai
Treptytyvourav. And it is necessary to know that, from the great-
est dangers, the greatest honors also result : épôvras kai to s
otpat myots, ..., oia Tertövéaoru ; lit. Seeing the generals, also, ...,
what they have suffered; instead of 6p3vras oia kai oi arparmyo
Tetróváaoruv.
3. In connected discourse, it is a favorite arrangement to
place at the beginning of a sentence that word which is most
intimately connected with the thought of the preceding sen-
tence; e. g. kal 6 20kpárms (3)\éras eis rôv Kpitova 'O Kpitov,
épm, dirayayêro Tus taúrmy oikake. Kai Tatt my pév dirfiyév twes Tów
roi. Kpirovos Boöráv rekai kotropévnv.
4. In like manner, two words of similar or of opposite mean-
ing are often brought together in the same sentence ; e. g. Kairot
ðarts tº into tôv Toàeptov Tepºp6évrº p 6 vos p 6 vº ovuffel kTé. De Cor.
137. Totaú6 éAtoorov #vvrov q xox fi Taxi's. Antig. 231. KaNés
ofu äv plot 6 (3tos ein . . . &\\m v šć &\ \ms tróA v TóAe os duetſ?opévg.
Plat. Apol. 37, d. So also, äA\os āAAo, alius aliud; &\\os àNNoël,
alius alibi; &\\os àN\oore, alºus alto, etc.
5. Of a similar character is the so-called chiasmus, in which
two connected words are followed by two connected words of
opposite meaning in the inverse order; e. g. troXAdkus jôová 6pa-
x et a pakpāv Tikret A iſ trn v.
III. SOME SPECIAL RUILES.
1. Position of the Article.
(a.) The article is often separated from its substantive by
Small words, as aév, Hèv yáp, pèv oſſºv, 8é à oðv, yé, 8é ye, Té, Tê yáp,
toi, Toivvv, yāp, 3%, #pa ; also by oiual ; sometimes by long clauses;
e.g. Tiju prév Tpóqaatu, iſ 6 & piſtmp, 6 pie v of v Tpeogárepos, tº 6’ of v
xiv. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS
otpatū, Kai Tôv trap' éav Tó Sé 8apſ3ápov, Töv čk Töv EXA fivov
e is Toijs 3 ap 34 povs q68ov, kté. When a preposition stands be-
fore the article, the prose arrangement is either Tpós 66 Tóv čvöpa,
or Tpos Tóvãvöpa 6é (not Tpös Têv Šē àvôpa. The last arrangement
is, however, allowed in the poets), áró Te Tijs jôovňs, Tept Te Tijs
tróNeos. Not unfrequently, two, or even three, articles in differ-
ent forms follow one another, as, T & Tijs Tó v ToMAóv JºvXijs àupata,
the eyes of the soul of the many.
(b.) The position and meaning of the attributive adjective
(ó dyadès duñp, or 6 dwip 6 dyadós, or divip 6 dyadós) and of the predi-
cate adjective (dyadès 6 divip or 6 dwip dyadós) are explained in
all the grammals.
(c.) The adnominal genitive, like an adjective, takes either
the attributive or the predicate position ; as, 6 Tów 'Aómvatov Šà-
pos, or 6 &mpos 6 Tów 'A6mvatov, in which arrangement the empha-
sis is on the genitive, the people of the Athenians; 6 &mpos Táv
'Aönvatov, or Töv 'Aónvaiou 6 &muos, in which arrangement the em-
phasis lies on the governing substantive, the people of the Athe-
nians (in distinction from the aristocracy or from the government).
(d.) The adjective pronoun follows the same rule as the attribu-
tive adjective ; e. g. 6 epiós Tatip, or 6 Tarijp 6 epiós.
(e.) The genitive of the personal pronoun takes the predicate
position ; as, 6 Tatip pov, 6 Tatip o'ow, 6 Tatip attoo, or airoi, 6
Tatip. The enclitic genitives may also stand before the article,
When a word in close logical connection precedes; as, Édºm pov 6
Tarſip, *@m orov 6 Tatip; but not poſſ 6 Taráp, goû 6 Tatip at the
beginning of a sentence; Épot, 6 Tatip or 6 Tatip poë is a form
of expression which is said not to occur.
(f) The genitive of the reflexive pronouns, on the other hand,
takes the same position as the adjective pronoun in Attic Greek;
as 6 pavrov (oreavrot, Éavroſ) rathp, my own (thine own, his own)
father. In later Greek, as in the New Testament, the Order
ô Tatſip Šavrov is common.
2. Position of the Negatives.
The regular place for où or puff is directly before the word which
it negatives ; e. g. oi Śē Távres pêv oi k \6ov, 'Aptaios be kré. ; oi
IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE, XV
yāp grpattötal of k &pagav iéval Too Tpégo. When the negative
stands before an article, a relative, a conjunction, a preposition,
and sometimes before other parts of speech, some antithesis is
commonly implied or expressed, e. g. ôpioMoyoimu äu èyoye oi karū
toūrows eivat fiftop, I should acknowledge that I am an Orator,
not after their sort (Sc. but of quite a different sort); pug 606;ual
ôé of k &lti toãrg &gaorav, and they affirmed that they were hired
not for this purpose (sc. but for quite a different one); €vois (kat-
pots) oix àora é8ovXópe6a, dAN' àora öoim Të Tpépat #6et 6éxeréat, in
which it was necessary to accept, not all that we wanted, but all
that the circumstances would grant. -
Sometimes a special emphasis is given to the negative by
throwing it to the end of the sentence; e.g. ôv y eiðov oëöetróTrote,
whom I have seen never ; ŚNotto pièv piñ, may he not perish
In conditional sentences, the negative puff stands regularly in the
condition directly after ei or éâv, the negative oi at the beginning
of the conclusion; e. g. oi k &v Tóv éavrot Tore oikou ka?\ós tus oikā-
orelev, ei p :) Távra éto erau &v Tpooróéetat, One could never regulate
well his own house, unless he knows everything that he needs.
y *A 5 * 3. f * º * 3 V 5 * 3 y
Oik &v étoimorev 'A'yagias Taira, el p ij čyö airów KéAévoſa.
3. Position of Čv.
(a.) With a conjunction or relative pronoun and the subjunc-
tive mood, ću stands usually next after the conjunction or the
relative ; as, Ös āv, Šatus āv, Trpiv čv, Örav- Ör àv, Étretóóv= étrelëi)
ău, äráv= étrel àv. Sometimes, however, a Small word or two may
stand between the conjunction or relative and āv; as, 8é, Té, pºév,
'yáp; e. g. ēos pév čv, Xen. Anab., 1, 4, 8.
(b.) In a principal sentence, with a past tense of the indica-
tive, with the optative, infinitive, or participle, àv stands usually
just after the verb; as, Avov čv, Adopt åv. Yet it may stand after
another word, which is to be made emphatic ; e. g. Plat. Cr. 53, c.
kai oëk oiet à q xmpov & v qave to 6at Tö Tod Bokpátovs Tpāypa; and do
you not think the conduct of Socrates will appear unseemly 2 It
is joined regularly to the negatives and to interrogative words;
as, oùk ãv, où8' àv, oùirot' àv, Tis àv, ti äv, Tí ó’ &v, ti 87t' àv, Tós āv,
* y / * … * ‘5. 2 -
Tós yap &v, Štos àv, Tolos àv, Širotos év, &p' àv, Kré, ; also to adverbs
xvi. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS
of time, place, manner, etc.; e. g. rār āv, vrai,6’ &v, eikóros &v, toos
ãv, jktor' àv, Kré. tº
(c.) Expressions like oiual, épm, kré, are often placed between
ãv and the verb to which it belongs; e. g. Plat. Sympos.,
202, d. ti otºv čv, Épmv, ein 6 "Epas; what then, said I, would
Eros bel
(d.) In certain connections, #v with the optative, or indicative
of a past tense, is transferred from a dependent clause, with
which it logically belongs, and placed in the principal sentence.
This occurs particularly in the expression, oùk oiâ’ &v et : e.g. oik
oió' àvei Teigalput; instead of oijk oió' ei Tetoratput àv, I don't know
whether I should persuade ; oëk oió' àv ei éktmoſépmy traičá Tore
Totoorov, I don't know whether I should ever have acquired such
a, SOI).
(e.) Although the adverb év can never stand first in its sen-
tence, yet, in certain parenthetical clauses, āv with the optative
may be first in its clause, as in the phrase, óv Tus eitrot, du Tus pain,
ãv toros pain. Such clauses were so closely connected with the
rest of the sentence as not to require any separation from it by
commas, and then äv appeared, as usual, postpositive ; e. g. ti
oëv àv Tus etirot at ypáqets kté, why then, One might Say, do you
continue to propose, etc. With the common punctuation (ri oºv,
äu ris eitrot, or ypájets Kré.), āv appears as first in its clause (pre-
positive).
4. Position of pév and 8é.
Regularly pºv and 8é are joined to those words which are anti-
thetical. To this rule, however, there are many exceptions.
When two words are closely united in meaning, pèv and 8é
often stand between them, as Tā pèv trapaakevi....', tà èë Yvöpm;
often, also, after both words, as tois a 6plagu pév....', tà yuápm
84: av Šešā pew...., áy dpurrepā 8é. When a substantive with-
out the article is governed by a preposition, 8é takes usually
the third place; as, 8tá uév káNNos.... Stå Sövapu 8é; less frequently
the second place; as, 8th 83 ppóvnow. When the substantive ex-
pressions, 6 p.év, 6 84, are governed by a preposition, pév and 8é
stand regularly after the preposition ; as, év pèv àpa tois goqipovov-
pev, &v če toſs ot, in some things we are discreet, in others not ;
IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE. xvii
eis pév točs 58pišovres, roſs Šč ŠovXečovres, towards some persons
insolent, towards others Servile.
NOTE. The above rules are collected mainly from Kühner's Ausführliche
Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, Zweite Auflage, in durchaus neuer
Bearbeitung. Hannover, Hahn'sche Hofbuchhandlung, 1870. I am aware
that on one important point, the relative position of the verb and its object,
the rule above given differs from the statement on the same point in the
learned, elaborate, and very valuable essay of Professor Charles Short,
LL.D., “On the Order of Words in Attic Greek Prose,” prefixed to the
English-Greek Lexicon by C. D. Yonge, published by Messrs. Harper &
Brothers, New York. The point is one on which there is ground, perhaps,
for different opinions; yet, after some examination of the Attic prose
writers, I am constrained to agree with Kühner in regard to the usual—
perhaps I may say normal — order. I have found in the writings of Xeno-
phon a much larger number of instances in which the object follows the
verb than in those of the authors preceding and following him, Thucydides
and Demosthenes for example ; yet even in Xenophon, I think, the number
of instances in which the object precedes the verb preponderates over those
in which the object follows it ; and hence I have given the rule in the
above form.
EXPLANATION OF THE PRINCIPAL ABBREWIATIONS
Att.
cf.
COgn. .
COIſ) [Ol.
Const.
Curt. .
enclit.
e. g.
ff. .
fr
Good. “ .
Had
USED IN THIS WORK.
Attic. .
Latin confer = compare, see.
cognate. -
common or commonly.
construction. -
Crosby's Greek Grammar.
Curtius’s “ & 6
enclitic.
exempli gratia, for example.
and the following.
from.
Goodwin’s Greek Grammar.
Hadley's 6 & & G -
Had. El.
Koch .
Küh. .
kTé.
Lat.
lit.
perh. .
SC.
St.
llSUI.
W.
6 & Elements of the Greek Language.
Griechische Grammatik, von Dr. Ernst Koch.
Kühner's Greek Grammar.
kal to étepa = et cetera.
Latin.
literal or literally.
perhaps.
Scilicet, understood.
instead of.
usual or usually.
with.
The remaining abbreviations, as gen., acc., ind., for genitive, accusative,
indicative, are so common as to require no explanation.
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
L E S S ON I.
SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
References.
GooD., §§ 200, 205. KüH., §§ 255, 256.
HAD., 697 – 713. Koch, S$97–99, 103.
HAD. El., 473–485. CR., §§ 594 ft.
CURT., §§ 486 – 488, 492-494, 502-505.
IExamples.
A / / 3. *A Af an 2 * º
1. 4 (8 op. o'ot, 6 Küpe, Taütmv yvyatka, ćumu ovo'av
6vyatépa. I offer you, eyrus, this (person), being a daugh-
ter of mime, (as) a wife.
/ 5 . N e \ 6. / 5 * 5 A.
2. II & Te to A at éyò écov eival Amèéva d'êt ce?v divěpá-
Tow. I am persuaded that I have voluntarily wronged no
One among men.
5 / / a fº
3. ‘ATayyáNXere 'Aptaio, ött jue's vºicópe v 8aaixéa
ical ow8és àuºv črt pudyeTat. Announce to Ariaeus that
we have conquered the king, and that no one longer fights
with us.
3/ 3. / ^ &M 3/ / y 5
4. E Tret 6 ow av'TOUS, RCdt. Ovs 67Teloſa, TOUTOUS exov €7TO-
pevöumu. I tried to persuade them, and with those whom
I (actually) persuaded, I proceeded.
5 4 t / 6 - / V / * \ e/ -
e é ºf 6 et p ou Tpoatãutes Tovs otpatiºtas, Kai čva
- l - A.
2 - EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
ye Noxayov 8tépéetpav. Coming up, they tried to corrupt
the soldiers, and they succeeded in corrupting a single
Captain.
6. At T\eta Tat TöAets Tp o a t d T Tova t toſs Toxſtats
Am KAéttetv \v 8é Tus roſtov to Tapagatum, &mutav'airo's
é Té6eo a v. Most cities enjoin on their citizens not to
steal; and if any one of these transgresses at all, they are
in the habit of inflicting a penalty on him (lit. on them,
referring to the indefinite Tis).
7. Tas Totaſtas dyvouogºvas vouſſow avvovotals àu
Tateo 6at #ko. I am come supposing such misunder-
Standings might be stopped by familiar conversations.
8. IIAéete évêa 8m étrº 6 v weſte” Taxa v. You are
Sailing (to that very place) where you have long been de-
Siring (to Sail).
* Xen. Anab. 7, 6, 37. The reading in Krüger's edition.
Vocabulary.
Offer, 8téopºl, to give; offer, or
try to give; offer (in the pres.
dé imperf.)
Daughter, 6vyármp, ſpós, j.
How much, tróoros, m, ov.
Money, Xphpara, ov, Tá.
Am persuaded, Tétrelopat, pf.
pass. of Teiða).
Have wronged, injured, döukó
(éo).
Voluntarily, Šköv eiwat ; plur.
ékávres eival.
Man, human being, àv6potros,
ov, 6.
Announce, dirayyáAAo (diró, dy-
'yāAXo).
Ariaeus, 'Aptaios, ov, 6.
Cyrus, Kūpos, ov, 6.
Have conquered, am victori-
ous over, vukó (do).
Soldier, otpattérms, ov, 6.
King, Baqi)\ets, écos, 6.
Persuade, Tretëo, try to per-
suade, pres. Ó impf.
March, Topečopau ; march
against, Topetopat éiri, w, acc.
Come up, come towards, Tpdor-
elplt.
Corrupt, 8taq,6eipo; try to cor-
rupt, pres. & impf.
Captain, Noxayás, oo, ö.
Most, TAetortot, Sup. of Toxts.
City, TróAus, eas, i.
Inflict, €itutiému (€rt, Tiëmpu).
Penalty, a fine, (muta, as, i.
Citizen, Toxirms, ov, 6.
LESSON I. 3
No one, où8ets, M. infin. pumöets.
Any One, Tis ; anything, Ti.
Steal, k\étr+go.
Am Come, jkao. -
Long (adv.), long ago, TáAal.
Desire, étuffvuò (éo).
Stop, put a stop to, traßeuv.
Misunderstanding, dyvopográvn,
e
77 S, 77.
Familiar conversations, inter-
course, ovvovoria, as, i.
Such, Totodros, towaúrm, rototro(u).
Suppose, vopuigao.
Sail, TNéao. -
Where, Évêa ; intens. #v6a 3%, the
very place where.
Mention, make mention of, re-
member, pºépumpal.
Formerly, Tpórepov.
Arise, come into being, ytyvo-
plat.
Well, honorably, ka)\ós.
Do, Totò (éo).
Graeci, "EX\mves, oi.
Proverbium, trapouta, as, j.
Amicus, q i\os, ov, 6.
Communis, koués, #,6v ; also 6s, 6v.
Omnis, tras, Tāora, Tāv.
Maximus, pºéytotos, m, ov.
Ornamentum, kóoptos, ov, 6.
Amicitia, ºpt)\ia, as, i.
Tollo, äqapéo, ö (diró, aipéo).
Qui, Ös, j, 6; 60 rus, frts, 6 tu (in-
cludes anteced. & relat.).
Exea, §§ airfis.
Verecundia, aičás, oùs, i.
Oral Exercise.
Hicet, He is come.
Otxetat, He is gone.
'ETAoûret, He was rich.
'ETAoûtmarev, He became
rich.
'E8aaff, evey, He was king.
'E8aa Nevaev, He became
king.
'Hpyev, He held office.
*Hpčev, He obtained office.
'AT00unjaket, He dies.
Téðumkev, He is dead.
Tyveral, He becomes.
Téyovev, He is.
Muplumaket, He reminds.
Mépumtat, He remembers,
makes mention of
Kék\mtat, IHe is called.
Kéktmtat, He possesses.
IIćTotòev, He trusts.
IIébukev, He is by nature.
"Eaſtmaceu, He stands.
'ATóAoAev, He is ruined.
Oī8év, He knows.
Ełoffev, He is accustomed.
"Eotkev, He is like, it is like,
it seems.
Aéðotkev, He fears.
4. EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Nuka, He has conquered. °ſ?txeto, He was gone.
'Aëticeſ, He has wronged. 'Euéuum to, He remembered.
dºeſyet, He is banished. 'ETetroffet, He trusted.
‘Hºcev, He was come. ‘Eatricet, He was standing.
NOTE. These examples may easily be varied, if the teacher finds the
requisite time, by changing the number, person, and in Some instances the
tense; and to these examples some others may be added.
To be Written,
1. He offered to Cyrus his own daughter. 2. How
much money did they offer to you ? 3. They are per-
suaded that they have voluntarily wronged no one among
men. 4. He announces to Ariaeus that he has conquered
the soldiers of the king. 5. He offered us money, and
tried to persuade us to march against the king; and, to
those whom he (actually) did persuade, he gave much
money. 6. Coming up, they corrupted many soldiers;
and they tried to corrupt the captains also. 7. Most cities
are in the habit of inflicting (aor. Or pres.) a penalty on
their citizens, if any one of these steals anything. .8. He
is come announcing that our soldiers have conquered the
king. 9. He is persuaded that he has wronged no one
of his soldiers voluntarily. 10. He has long been desiring
to put a stop to such misunderstandings by familiar con-
versations. 11. He has long been supposing that such
misunderstandings might be stopped by familiar conver-
sations. 12. They are sailing (to that place) where they
have long been desiring (to sail). 13. You make mention
of the good men who have formerly arisen; and you do
well. 14. In Graecorum proverbio est; Amicorum esse
communia omnia. 15. Maximum ornamentum amicitiae
tollit, qui ex ea tollit verecundiam.
J.
LE
S
t
S
ON II, 5
L E S S O N II.
TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS,
JReferences,
GooD., §§ 202-204. KöH., § 257.
HAD., 714 – 718, 734 – 738. CURT., § 491, 495 – 506.
HAD. El., 486, 502 – 504, CR., 590, a, 613.
Koch, \\ 100, 101.
Examples.
1. "Hálov 80 6 fival of Taſtas Tās TóNets uáNNov )
Two Gaſpépumv &p yet u ajtów. He demanded that these
cities be given to him, rather than that Tissaphernes Con-
tinue to rule over them.
2. II poºré u iſ as éppumvéa eitrev, &rt 8 ot. Not to 8 ta-
Nex 6 ju a Tois àpxöögl: Tots 8e otpatmiyo's éðošev dico 0-
or a t. Sending forward an interpreter, he said that he
wished to confer with the commanders; and it seemed to
the generals expedient to hear.
3. Bo v Neſov pleu 8paôéos, T & Téxet be taxéos Tà
66; a v Ta. Deliberate slowly, but execute quickly your
resolves (or those things which have seemed expedient).
4. "Otto 60ket Tait', bm, à va Te º ud To Tàu Xeſpa. To
whomsoever these things seem expedient, said he, let him
raise his hand.
5. "Hvěow kai éxópevov, 6Tóte of Toxéutov & Jºe a 6 at
aúToys ŠueXNov. They sang and danced, whenever the
enemy were about to see them.
6. X iſ v Teuvé plot tas d"Tokplasts cat 8paxvtépas
To tet, et péXXo a ol āTreo 6 at . Cut short your replies to
me and make them briefer, if I am to follow you.
7. "Ečeň6ma'av Tów Meyapéov vava' a pas à vu Tp o-
Téa Jºe v.v. They asked the Megarians to escort them
With ships.
6 IXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
5 * * an / e
8. "Ev'raúða £épáms, Šte ék Tijs EXAdãos fit Tºm 6 els
Th Adºx) dTexaspet, AéyeTal oi ko čop fia at Tavta Ta Ba-
/
GüAeta.
In that place, Xerxes, when, conquered in the
(well known) battle he was withdrawing from Greece, is
said to have built this palace.
Vocabulary.
Give, Štěopt. In the pres, dº impf.
it may mean to offer.
Send forward, Tpotrépito.
Interpreter, éppamueñs, écos, 6.
Wish, BoöNopat ; not so strong as
êtrièupéad (étri Övpués), I set my
heart upon, I desire earnest-
ly; stronger than éðe Ago, I am
willing, I consent, I wish.
Carry into execution, execute,
éTtTeXó (éo).
Things determined, resolves,
Tà 66&auta.
Demand, dātā (66).
Deliberate, 8ov\eñopat.
Slowly, 8paôéos.
Quickly, taxéaos.
Confer with, 8ta\éyopat (dep.
pass.).
Hand, Xeip, Xelpós, #.
Raise, stretch forth, divateivo.
Enjoin on, Tpoo Tatto.
Cut short, orvuTépavao.
Reply, dirókplots, eos, #.
Make, Totò, 6a).
Brief, briefer, 8paxºs. 8paxóTepos.
Am to, am about to, pláA\o, U.
pres. & fut. infin.
Inflict, Turíðmut.
Penalty, fine, Čmpia, as, j.
Ask, request, Šáopal, w, gem.; dep.
p(tSS.
Defeated, to be, etc., jtrópat
(āopal); (18 pass. of vukáo.
Escort, orvputſpotréatra).
Sing, #66).
Dance, Xopeño.
Withdraw, dToxopéo, ö).
Build, oikočopuégo, ö).
Palace, 6aori Aeva, Tá.
Moneo, £vopdao, ö, usu. Comst. GCC.
& particip.
Arş, téxum, ms, h.
Sine, &vev, w, gem.
Assiduitas, éturſſøevots, eos, i.
Dicendi, Too Aéyetu.
Multurm, pud Ma.
Iuvo, are, orvpºpépetu Tuvi.
Malo, 30%Nopal pax\ov, const. (LCC.
nt. infim.
Sapiens, oroq,6s, fl. Óv.
Hostis, Toñépitos, iov, 6.
Metuo, öéôouka or öéöta, infin.
ôeótéval ; poſséopat, otpat.
Quam, j.
Stultus, divām Tos, ov.
Civis, Toxirms, ov, Ö.
Laudo, Tauvéo, ö).
LESSON II. - 7
Oral Exercise.
Eärew 3rd droðdvow 6 IIepukxfts, He said that Pericles
was dead.
'Eau Trotſ, Tobro, If he do this (habitually).
'Eav Totſap Totto, If he do this.
El Aéyot, If he should speak (habitually).
Ei Aéetev, If he should speak.
Aéye, Speak thou (habitually), or continue speaking, or
go to speaking. -
Aéov, Speak thou. ſ
BoſNetat Xèyetv, He wishes to speak (habitually).
Botſ\erat Aééat, He wishes to speak.
Tāv 6tpav kºele, Shut the door (habitually).
Tºv 6&pav k\eta ov, Shut the door.
Thy 6%pav čvoušov, Open the door.
BoöAetat Tiju 6%pav duoča, He wishes to open the door
"EXeyev Štt yodºbot, He said that he was writing.
"Exeyev ôtt ypdalot, He said that he would write.
"Exeyev Štt Ypdºrétev, He said that he wrote.
"Exeyev čtv ſyeypados elm, He said that he had written.
dºmai 'ypdºpetu, He says that he is writing. -
Ømal ypdºretv, He says that he will write.
Ømal ypdalcat, He says that he wrote.
‘pmoſt yeypadéval, He says that he has written.
"O tº Toma'ot, où 8tea jumve, What he would do, he did
not indicate.
MéNAo &\leq 0a ore, or péA\o 6pāv ae, I am about to
see you.
NOTE. The dependent moods do not denote time (but only the state of
the action), except in indirect discourse. t
To be Written.
1. He tried to persuade them to give these cities to him.
2. They persuaded Cyrus to offer much money to the
soldiers. 3. Sending forward an interpreter, they an-
8 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
nounced that they wished to carry into execution those
things which had been determined. 4. We demanded
that the generals deliberate slowly, but execute quickly
their resolves. 5. He is persuaded that he has voluntarily
wronged no one of the enemy who conferred (particip.)
with him. 6. He persuaded all to whom these things
seemed expedient to raise their hands. 7. We enjoin on
you to cut short your replies and to make them briefer, if
we are to confer with you. 8. They are in the habit of
inflicting a penalty on those who do not cut short (par-
ticip.) their replies and make them briefer. 9. They asked
the generals to deliberate slowly and to execute their
resolves quickly. 10. They are said to have been defeated
in battle. 11. They are said to have asked the Megarians
to escort them with ships. 12. They are said to have
sung and danced, when, conquered in the (well known)
battle, they were withdrawing. 13. He is said to have
sung and danced, after having built this palace. 14.
|Moneo artem sine assiduitate dicendi non multum juvare.
15. Malo, te Sapiens hostis metuat, quam stulti cives lau-
dent. - N
L E S S O N III.
THE MOODS.
Final and Object Clauses after tva, Ös, 8tros, ºff.
References.
GOOD., §§ 215–218. KüH., § 330.
HAD., 739 – 743. CURT., §§ 530 – 533.
HAD. El., 507 – 510. CR., § 624.
ROCH, § 111.
! Examples.
Af \ / º
1. Kövas Tpépets, iva orot Tows Xàkovs d"To Töv Tpoğd-
Tov dºt ep iſ ko a tw. You nourish dogs, that they may
keep off for you the wolves from the sheep.
LESSON III. 9
2. Mévov 66etta Nos 37Nos v šartóvuòu pév TAoûtov
toxvpós, étuffvuòu be āpxetu, Štos TAeto Na u & d vot,
étuffvuòu èe Tupuaadat, tva TAeto kepôa i vow' bixos Te
é8otſ\eto eivat Tots géytotov ôvvagevots, ºva dºuków Am
8 t 8 offm 8&nv. Menon the Thessalian plainly desired
riches exceedingly (lit. was plain desiring); and desired to
rule, that he might receive more (money); and desired to
be honored, that he might acquire more (money); and he
wished to be a friend to those who had the most power,
that, having done wrong, he might not suffer punishment
(or give satisfaction).
3. Ta TNota catécavaev, tva um Köpos é º a 3%. He
had burned (aor, as plpf) the boats, that Cyrus might not
CFOSS OVéI’. *
4. "Eyð uèv juás étrauð, Širos & kal jue's épé £7 a t-
v ča ere, éuot uéAmaſet. I praise you; but that you may
praise me, will be my care.
5. "Otros Taira amões duépôtrov Ted a et at. (See)
that no one among men ascertain these things.
6. "Ikavos (bpovtſºeuv fiv &ros éxot atpattà Tâ étrº-
TſSeta. He was able to take care that the army might
have provisions.
7, doğoºpa, ai, Toºro yév mt a t. I fear that this may
happen (Vereor he accidat). Čdoğolſumu am Toºro Yévot-
to, or dogoûump ui, Toºro y áu mt a t. I feared that this
might happen.
8, Mº atejêe TNovteſv, am Taxi Trévms yévy. Be not
in haste to be rich, lest you become quickly poor.
Vocabulary.
Seems expedient, Sokeſ, fr. So- Dog, küov, Kvvós, ò.
kéo, 6. - Wolf, \{jkos, ov, 6.
Nourish, rpéqo. Sheep, Tpó8ata, ov, td.
Many, troX\ot ; much, ToMás. Reep off, direpčko (diró, pëko).
Large, péyas. Plain, Öm)\os, m, ov.
1 %
10
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Friend, pi\os, ov, 6.
Most, greatest, especially, Hé-
'yuatov.
To have power, to be able,
öövapai.
Suffer punishment, give satis-
faction, Ötöðval 6tkmv,
Take care, ppovrićo.
Burn, katakaio.
Boat, TAotov, ov, Tó.
The enemy, oi ToMéutot.
River, Totapuás, où, 6.
Cross over, Šuagaivo.
Army, otpatvá, as, i.
Provisions, éturſſ&eta, ov, Tá.
Fear, q08o0ptat, spoken of sudden
and inconsiderate fear; 8éôouka
or Šáðta, of deliberate and rea-
sonable fear.
Ascertain, Tvv8ávopat.
Beware, imperat, of épéo, to see.
Quickly, taxi or Taxécos.
To be in haste, or Teijóo.
Become, yiyvouat.
Poor, Tévns, mros.
adj.
Not, puff w. the imperat., infin., and
w. conditional or final particles.
That or lest, after verbs of fearing,
piñ. -
To jest, Tatóo. To speak in
jest, Aéyetv Taiſov.
Esse (= edere, to eat), áo 6io.
Oportet, Xpſ.
TJt, iva or öTaos.
Vivo, Čáo), 6, generic, and spoken
of all things that have life, op-
posed to drofluffolketu ; 31660, 6,
especially of human life.
Amo, ºbt)\éa), 6.
Amabilis, ptAntós, m, 6v. -
Timeo, q}oğoopal, 6éðouka or 8éöta.
ut, after verbs of fearing, u) oë.
Jºng., that not.
Sustineo, ºpépo.
Labor, Oris, Tóvos, ov, 6.
As subst, or
Oral Exercise.
AñAds attv Tºvuòv, He plainly desires, or, It is plain
that he desires.
47Nos v Tuffvuòv, He plainly desired, or, It was plain
that he desired.
£póvTuđe Širos, Take care that.
"Opa pºi, Beware lest.
‘poğodual pºſſ, I fear that, Vereor me.
908ojuat um oë, I fear that not, Vereor ut.
"Otros oiv čaea 6e &#lot, (See) then that you be worthy.
Opa pam Taigov Aéym, Beware lest he speak in jest.
e/ N / 3/ - tº e
Opa Am Taíčov čAeyev, Beware lest he was speaking in
jest.
LESSON III. 11
"Opa w, traigov Aéet, Beware lest he shall speak injest.
M7, a Tejöe TNovteiv, Be not in haste to be rich.
"Iva avvréuvo, To be brief.
"Iva èc Toitov ćpéopat, To begin with these things.
‘ſ’s àv adóps, äkova ov, Hear, that you may learn.
Aéðotka Am étrº.a66pe6a, I am afraid we may forget.
Mà dypotkötepov # To dwmffes eitreºv, (I am afraid) it is
too rude a thing to say the truth. …”
"Epxetal va toûto lon, He is coming that he may see
this.
*HA6ev Šva toûto 80t, or’HA6eviva toûto 8m. He came
that he might see this.
Mà (boğot, p.m #8m Tpeogūrepos ºs, ) &ate Tāv yA&T-
Tau EAA mutkhv uabeiv, Do not fear that you are already
too old to learn Greek.
To be Written,
1. It seemed to him expedient to nourish many and
large dogs, that they might keep off for him the wolves
from the sheep. 2. Menon the Thessalian plainly desires
to be a friend to those who have the most power, that,
having done wrong, he may not suffer punishment. 3.
Take care that you burn the boats, in order that the enemy
may not cross over the river. 4. (See to it) that your
army have provisions. 5. He fears that the dogs may not
keep the wolves from the sheep. 6. It will be my care
that they cut short their replies and make them briefer.
7. He feared that some of the soldiers would ascertain
these things. 8. Beware lest, having done wrong, you
quickly suffer punishment. 9. Let those who are in haste
to be rich beware lest they become quickly poor. 10. He
was not in haste to be rich, fearing that he should become
quickly poor. 11. He feared that the enemy would burn
the boats, in order that the army might not cross over the
12 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
river. 12. (See) that you deliberate slowly and that you
execute quickly your resolves. 13. They feared that the
enemy were speaking in jest. 14. Esse Oportet ut vivas,
non Vivere ut edas. 15. Ut ameris, amabilis esto. 16.
Timeo ut Sustineas labores.
LESS ON IV.
THE MOODS.
Conditional Sentences.
References.
GooD., §§ 219–222. RüH, § 339, I, (a), (b).
HAD., 744 – 746. * CURT., §§ 534 – 541.
HAD. El., 511 – 514. CR., § 631, Forms a & b.
KOCH, S 114, 1, 4.
IExamples.
1. Taüta Tävta Tp o 6 vu j6 m t t dis oraq atata juºv
drayyetaat, ei aſ Tis oot doxoxia t vºy X divet oia a.
Consent to rehearse to us all these things, as distinctly as
possible, unless you chance to have some engagement (un-
less there chance to be to you some occupation).
2. 'Eve'y k d to Tus to pappakov, et Tétp a TT at e?
8è uſi, Tp tº dro 6 ávěpotros. Let some one bring the
poison, if it has been mixed (lit. rubbed): but if not, let
the man mix it. -
3. El uév 6éoù ºv, oùk #v aloxpokepôňs el 8 aloxpo-
kepājs, oùk fiv 6éoù. If he was (descended) from a god, he
was not avaricious; but if he was avaricious, he was not
(descended) from a god.
4. El 8é Tm Tooro èo Tat, tº &m baixayya kakov
éat a t. And if this shall anywhere be (the case), it will
be a damage to the whole phalanx.
LESSON IV.
13
5. El éépávt mae, cai ja Tp a rev. If it thundered,
it also lightened.
Af * - 3. *A
6. El &/30 & Aero, Š8 & va to & v Tatra ééatatav.
If
he wished, he would be able to deceive in these things.
7. El Trept cauoi Tuos Tpdypatos Tp o it £6 e To Aé-
yetv, Tréa you áv. If it were proposed to speak about
any new affair, I should have waited.
8. El ui, jue's #x0 ete, Top evdae 6a 3 v čt 8aat-
Aéa.
the king.
If you had not come, we should be marching against
A
9. El TAelovs a v ve-Méy mo av, Škº vööve vo’ev &v
8tabòapñvat Toxi toº otpateiſuatos. If greater numbers
had been collected, much of the army would have been in
danger of destruction.
Vocabulary.
Avaricious, aloxpokepôňs, és.
Propose, Tpotíðmut.
Speak, Aéyò.
About, concerning, Trept, w. gem.
New (in kind), katvös, Ö, 6v ; new
(but not in kind), véos.
Affair, Trpayua, aros, Tó.
Wait, Čiréxo (éirí, éxo).
Greater numbers, more per-
sons, TAetoves or TAetovs.
Collect, ovXAéyo. -
Army, otpárewpua, aros, Tó. Not
easily distinguished from otpa-
Cf. Xen. Anab., I. A., 5,
where both words are spoken of
the same object.
To be in danger, kuwövveto.
Destroy, Staqbóelpo (Štá, q6eipo).
Come, Épxopal, f eiut, aor. A60w.
March, Topeiopat, dep, pass.
f
TLC1,
Against, €irl, w, acc.
Chance, happen, Tvyxávo.
Engagement, occupation, busi-
ness, doxo)\ta, as, i.
Rehearse, drayyáAAó (ätrö, äy-
'yāA\co).
Bring, q}épa).
Poison, qiāppakov, ov, Tó.
Mix (by rubbing or bruising),
Tpiðo.
Lighten, äotpán-to.
Thunder, 8povráo, 6.
Deceive, ééatratáo), 6.
Si, ei (w. indic. or optat.).
Facio, Totéo, 6. -
Magnus, in the sense much, troMás,
ToMAñ, ToMü.
Gratia, Xápts, wros, j; gratiam
habeo, xáptu exo, or oièa.
Non, où.
14 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Possum, Śivapai. Foris, out of doors, abroad, ééo.
Vivo, Čáo), @ 31660, 816. Cf. Scio, ire, yuyvöorko.
Lºn., III. Vy. Consilium, oroºppoo tºwn, ms, j.
Nisi, ei puff. Domi, oikot.
Litterae, literary pursuits, ypáp- Ibi esse, to be there, to be
para, usu. plaðiſlata, ārov, Tá. present, Tápetput.
Arma, ārāa, ov, Tá. Ipse, airós.
Parvi, of little value, worth Ad, trpós, or trapá.
little, 3Aiyou áčuos, ia, wou. Venio, ire, Épxopal.
Oral Exercise.
El Tooro Tpdºttet, kaxós éxet, If he is doing this, it is
well.
El Tooro Tpdttei, caxós éet, If he is doing this, it will
be well.
El Totto Tpattel, judormicev, If he is doing this, he has
erred.
El Totto èTpače, KaNás éxet — kaxós eixev — ca.A6s
ëaxev — kaxós éet, If he did this, it is well—it was well
(continued)—it was well (simple past) — it will be well.
El Totto èTpatte, caxós &v eixev, If he were doing
this (now), it would be well.
El Totto èTpače, caxós àu éayev, If he had done this,
it would have been well. -
El 800Xeral, Sºvatat, If he wishes, he is able.
Ei SovXºja’etal, 8vvågetat, If he shall wish (or simply,
if he wish), he will be able. *. *
Ei é80üAero, Šēēvato, If he wished, he was able (con-
tinued). -
Ei é8ovXà0m, 8vvijón, If he wished, he was able.
El é8otºeto, Śēśvaro àv, If he wished, he would be able.
Ei égovXī0m, 8vvijón &v, If he had wished, he would
have been able.
Ei é80ſweto, övvijón &v, If he wished, he would have
been able. *
Ei é8ovXī0m, 8%uato &v, If he had wished, he would
be able.
#
LESSON IV. 15
To be Written.
1. If he is (descended) from a god, he is not avaricious:
he will not be avaricious. 2. If he were (descended)
from a god, he would not be avaricious. 3. If it had been
proposed to speak about any new affair, I should have
waited. If it were proposed to speak about any new
affair, I should wait. 4. If he shall burn the boats, Cyrus
will not cross over. If he burned the boats, Cyrus did
not cross over. If he had burned the boats, Cyrus would
not have crossed over. 5. If greater numbers are col-
lected, much of the army will be in danger of being de-
stroyed. 6. If greater numbers were collected, much of
the army would be in danger of being destroyed. 7. If
you do not come, we shall march against the king. If
you had not come, we should have marched against the
king. 8. If you chanced to have some engagement, you
would not be rehearsing all these things to us... 9. The
man would have brought the poison, if it had been mixed.
The man will bring the poison, if it has been mixed:
if it shall be mixed. 10. If it lightens, it also thunders.
If it shall lighten, it will also thunder. 11. If it light-
ened, it would also thunder. If it had lightened, it would
also have thundered. 12. If you wished, you would be
able to deceive in these things. If you had wished, you
would have been able to deceive in these things. 13. Si
feceris, magnam habebo gratiam. 14. Parvi Sunt foris
arma, nisi est consilium domi. 15. Non possem vivere,
nisi in literis Viverem. 16. Si ibi te esse Scissem, ad t
ipse Venissem. -
16 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
LESS ON V.
THE MOODS.
Conditional Sentences (continued).
References.
GooD., §§ 223 – 225. KüH., § 339, II.
HAD., 747, 748. CURT., §§ 545, 546.
HAD. El., 515, 516. CR., 631, Forms c & d.
|KOCH, S 114, 2 a, 2 b, 3.
Examples.
1. E& v um of biXéoodot 8a o ºxe ôa o a twº of 8aat-
Xffs” # two a 0 b ifta o a tv, oùk éa to caków TaüAa Taſs
TróAegiv. Unless either the philosophers shall become
kings, or the kings philosophers, there is no cessation of
calamities for states.
2. Kå v (cal àv) prev eixafloëpevos Totto an A éyo Tà
TreTpayuéva ŠuavTó, oix éxetu dToxia-aa-6at Ta katmyopm-
péva 66% o ow8 ép ois dévô Tupuaa 6av Šetkvěvat: Šà v 8
ép & kai Tetoimka kai TetoMitevpatt & ačićo, Tox\d-
icts Aéyetu dvayka a 6 ſo opt at Tepe épavtod. And if,
avoiding this, I shall not mention the things done by my-
self, I do not think I shall be able (lit. I shall not think I
have the ability) to refute the accusations, nor to show on
what (grounds) I lay claim to be honored; but if I pro-
ceed step by step to what I have accomplished as a citizen,
I shall be compelled to speak often of myself.
3. Xaptu et a op a t, & 3 v dico &m re. I shall be grate-
ful, if you listen. -
4. Ei dvaykalov elm déuceiv h dôuketo 6al, éNo tumu &v
pax\ov d8tkeſa 6at. If it should be necessary to do wrong
or to suffer wrong, I should prefer to suffer wrong.
5. "ſlo Tep &vel tis tatpos daffevoúat prev toſs cduvov-
LESSON V. 17
-- N te 5 /
atv elatov plm A you plmöé Öet k v tío 8i àu d'Iroqeißovtat
Tiju vögov, Tetêm be Texevtågeté Tws airów Kai Tà woulgº-
2 5 * / 5 * j * ^ *A / 6% 2
pºev airó ‘bepocto, dicoxov6óv čTi To avhua 6 večío “et
^ N. N. 2 / ey e A 5 3. 5 /
TO KCL, To: e To t more v ãv6poTos oùToori,S Ouk & 19 CL 7T 6 -
6.a ve v.” Just as if some physician, visiting the sick while
they were suffering, should not say nor indicate by what
means they might escape the disease; but when some one
of them should die and the customary funeral rites should
be performed for him, following to the grave, should recount,
“If this man here had done so and so, he would not have
died.”
* 8aat)\ffs, older Attic for 8aat)\eſs.
t retroimka kal TetroXtrevgat, a form of pleonasm, not uncommon in the
orators, by which a thought is dwelt upon and thus emphasized; not
easily expressed in English.
: Tó kal Tó, art. as demonst. pron.
§ oùrool = oëtos with demonst. iota.
Vocabulary.
Unless, éâv puff, w. Subjunc. or ei The accusations, charges,
puff w. indic. or optat.
If, Čáv w. Subjunc. or ei w. indic. or
optat.
Either...or, #...#.
Philosopher, ºptAóoroſpos, ov, 6.
To be a philosopher, pi\ooroºpéo,
6; aor. to become a philoso-
pher.
Ring, 8a0 iMets, écos, 6.
To be a king, 8a0 i\evo; aor. to
'become a king. *
Cessation, traúXa, ms, j. Fr. Traùo.
Calamity, kaków, où, Tâ
State, Tóts, eos, i.
Things done, Tà Terpayuéva.
To be able, to have ability, Éxo.
To refute, to do away with,
3. f
dToMüopiat.
things alleged, Tâ karmyopm-
péva.
Avoid, behave cautiously in
respect to, eúAağéopat, oùpat.
Proceed step by step, 8aôt{o.
Accomplish as a citizen, To)\t-
Tetopat; or with more fulness and
emphasis, Totò kai troXtrečopiat.
Am compelled,
(āvāykm).
Often, troAAdkus.
Am grateful, Xáptu oièa, or xáptu
2 f
dvaykáčopiat
éxo.
Listen to, drowo w. gem.
Show, indicate, point out, Set-
Kuvpit.
Lay claim, think worthy, détéo,
6, (āśtos).
IB
18
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Honor, rupidio, 6.
Necessary, unavoidable, dvay-
Katos, a, ov.
Do wrong, döuké0, 6, (äöukos; a
priv. Öikm).
Suffer wrong, dötkéopat, oùpat.
Physician, iarpós, où, 6.
Visit, go to, etorelpu w. dat. (eis,
eiut).
Sick, the one who is sick, Ó
kápivov.
Escape from, escape, diroqelīya,
(diró, ºpečyo), w, acc.
Disease, vóoros, ov, i.
This man here, oùtoori.
So and so, Tó kai Tó.
Die, TeXevráo, 6; 6vñoko, droða-
votpat, dréðavov, Téðumka.
Engagement. See L'm., IV. Eac. I.
Distinctly, oraq,6s; most dis-
tinctly, as distinctly as pos-
sible, és oraq,éotara.
Vicinus, 6 TAmortov (adv. w. art.,
w8ed as Subst.).
Equus, intros, ov, 6.
Melior...quam, duetvav...iff.
Habeo, ºxo.
Ne (enclit.)...an, Tórepov...#.
Malo, 3ow\opat...pa)\\ov.
Dolor, Aſtrm, ms, j.
Frango, w. dolorem, to suppress;
Taíſo, w, acc.; or the const. Taº-
eq6at w. gem. -
Occulto, dirokpátto (diró, kpúTrø).
Virtus, dpetà, fis, j.
Necessario, kat’ duáykmv, dváykm,
> z
avaykaios. º
Gloria, 66&a, ms, fi: eijóošía, as, i.
Etiamsi, kai ei.
Ago, to work for, to aim at,
épéyopat, w, gen.
Consequor, droNov6éo, ö, w, dat.
Senectus, yipas, atos, als, Tó.
Plenus, TAffpms, es.
Voluptas, jôovň, fis, j.
Scio, to know how, trio rapat.
Utor, Xpáopal, Öpat; infin. Xpm-
orðat.
Oral Exercise.
'Eau Toºro Tpdtry, caxós éfet, If he shall do this, it
will be well.
faciat), bene erit.
El Tooto Tpd"Tot, Kaxtos
would be well.
Lat. Si hoc faciet (or fecerit, or sometimes
éxot, If he should do this, it.
Lat. Si hoc faciat, bene sit.
El Tooto &rpatte, kaxós eixeu, If he did this, it was
well (continued).
El Tooto &rpaës, caxós éayev, If he did this, it was
well (simple past).
El Tooto Tpatte, caxós àv eixeu, If he did this (con-
tinued), it would be well.
El Tooto ëTpače, kaxós àu éaxev, If he had done this,
it would have been well.
LESSON V. - 19
El Tooto Tpdéet, kaxós éet, If he shall do this, it will
be well (more vivid than édiv w. Subjunc.).
'Eau um Xéyo Tà Terpayuéva èuavTó, If I do not men-
tion the things done by myself.
Eł pai, Neftoo, If I do not (if I shall not) mention; more
vivid than the foregoing.
Ei am Aéyout or Aéatat, If I should not mention.
Ei un Āeyov, If I did not mention.
Ei am éAeśa, If I had not mentioned.
To be Written.
1. Unless either the philosophers should become kings,
or the kings philosophers, there would be no cessation of
calamities for states. 2. Unless the philosophers had be-
come kings, there would have been no cessation of Calami-
ties for states. 3. And if, avoiding this, he had not
spoken of the things done by himself, he would not have
been able to refute the accusations. 4. If he had pro-
ceeded-step-by-step to what he accomplished-as-a-citizen,
he would have been compelled to speak often of himself.
5. If he should proceed-step-by-step to what he accom-
plished as a citizen, he would be compelled to speak often
of himself. 6. I should be grateful to you, if you would
listen to me, while-T-show (particip) on what (grounds) I
lay claim to be honored. 7. I should have been grateful
to you, if you had listened to me, in order that I might
show on what (grounds) I laid claim to be honored. 8. If
it is necessary to do wrong or to suffer wrong, I shall prefer
to suffer wrong. 9. If this man here does so and so, said
(ébm) a certain physician, he will not die. 10. If greater
numbers should be collected, much of the army would be
in danger of destruction. 11. If he chances to have no
engagement, he will rehearse all these things to us as
distinctly as possible. 12. If he should chance to have
no engagement, he would rehearse all these things to us
20 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
most distinctly. 13. Si vicinus tuus equum meliorem
habeat quam tuus est, tuumne equum malis an illius 2 (If
your neighbor were to have, etc., would you prefer, etc.?)
14, Dolorem si non potero frangere, occultabo. 15. Vir-
tutem necessario gloria, etiamsi tu id non agas, consequitur.
16. Senectus plena est voluptatis, si illa Scias uti (if you
know how to use it).
L E S S O N VI.
THE MOODS.
Conditional Serviences (continued).
1Beferences.
GooD., §§ 225 – 227. KöH., § 339, 3 & R. 3.
HAD., 749 – 752. CURT., §§ 547 – 549.
HAD. El., 517 – 520. CR., §§ 632 ff.
RoCH, S 114, 3, R. 2.
TExamples.
1. Távt’ &ceivos #v airo's où8é (bovňv #k ovov, et tts
&\\0 tº 80 & Now to Aéyetv. He was everything to them:
they did not even listen to a word (lit. a voice), if any one
wished to say anything else (as perhaps some one might
wish). -
2. 'Eau of v ć6 eX iſ a mºre atpareſea-6at Te Kai Tpdºttetv
d£ios juáv airóv, toos & v, toos, 6 &vêpes 'A6mvatou, Té-
Xevöv to cal peya kit ma at a 6e dyadóv. If, therefore, you
will consent both to take the field and to act worthily of
yourselves, perhaps then, perhaps, men of Athens, you
might obtain some complete and great advantage.
3. At d ye ūu as a 5 to vs TāNat & v d"To A 6xette.
If you had been left to yourselves at least (or so far as de-
pended on yourselves), you would have perished long ago.
4. Oüre pixſtarov #évov oit 'Axečávěpov (pixov el-
LESSON VI. 21
To tu' à v éyò ore.” oix oùTo uaivopal, ei ºn kai Toys
6eptotôs kai Tois &AA0 tº uto 600 Tpatroutas (bùovs kai
£évows 8 et caxeſv Tóv putatogapevou. I should neither say
you were a guest of Philip nor a friend of Alexander, not
I; I am not so mad, unless it is proper to call both the
reapers, and those doing anything else for hire, friends and
guests of those who hire (them).
5, 'AAA& vöv ćyoye Tov uſixtata éiritupôvta Toſs Tre-
Tpaypévots #8éos à v ćpo tumu, Tâs Totas uépôos yevéa 6at
Tºw TóNtv č80 & Net’ & v. But now I, for my part, should
like to ask the One who especially censures what has been
done, to what party he would wish the city to belong.
6. Oik jv Tpos toū Kūpov Tpóirov čx ov't a pum droët-
8óvat. It was not in keeping with the character of Cyrus,
if he had (the pay), to fail to give (it) in full.
7. No cºvtes tíva &v d To creţva taev; If we should
be victorious, whom should we slay?
Jºac. Condition, et w. optat.; conclus. imperf. indic.
Cond., Čáv W. Subjunc.; conclus. optat. W. &v.
Cond., preposit. W. acc.; conclus. indic. past tense w. &v.
Cond., el w. indic. pres. ; conclus. optat. W. &v.
Cond., omitted; conclus. Optat. W. &v; & impf indic. w. Öv.
Cond., particip.; conclus. indic. past tense.
Cond., particip. ; conclus. Optat. W. &v.
* Notice the juxtaposition of éyò ore, thus bringing them into more
striking contrast; also their emphatic position, —the force of which I have
endeavored to present in my rendering.
Vocabulary.
Word, voice, pová, fis, #. Advantage, dyadów, où, Tó.
Anything else, &\\o ru. . I perish, diróNoNa; I perished,
Consent, be willing, 66%) o. was perishing, dToMáNeuv; 3d
Act, Tpátto. pf and plupf. of diróN\vpu, to
Worthily, détos. destroy.
Obtain, acquire, kráopat, któpat. Call, name, ka)\éo, 6.
Complete, TéAetos, a, ov. Say, declare, pnui, f. på, aor.
Great, piéyas, pleyá\m, péya. eitov.
22
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Guest, Śēvos, ov, 6.
Philip, pi\tTºros, ov, Ö.
It is proper, necessary, Öe.
Do, perform, TpáTTa).
Hire, pay, wages, puoróós, où, 6;
for hire, putorðoo.
Hire, take into One's pay, put-
o:660p.at, otpat.
Take the field, engage in a
military expedition, a Tpa-
Tetopat.
Pay in full, pay what is due,
drobibou.
Ask, inquire, épotágo, a07. Comm.
àpópmv.
Like to, expressed by jöéaos,
gladly, and the optat. w. &v.
What, what sort of, Totos, a, ov.
Party, pepts, ióos, j.
Belong to, become (a mem-
'ber) of, yiyvopal, w, gén.
I for my part, Éyaye.
Especially, pud)\to ra.
Censure, éturupada), 6.
What has been done, Tà Tre-
Tpaypéva.
To be in keeping with, eival
Tp Ös w. gem.
Character, Tpótos, ov, 6.
The Athenians, oi 'Aómwatov.
To fail, often ea pressed by the mega-
tive, w, the infin. puff.
To be victorious, vukda).
Slay, kill, dirokretva).
Praise, émauvéa), 6.
Hate, plugéco, 6.
Quid 2 why ‘P Tí; or övä ri;
Timeo, pogoûual, 660tka.
Beatus, eúðaipov, ov; beatus
futurus sum, eúðaipov eivat
(or éoreo6a) puéN\@.
Nemo, oùöets, oùöeputa, où8év.
Unquam, Toré (enclit.), Tótrore.
Sine, àvev w. gen. The clause
sine, etc., may perh.. be best ren-
dered by pij čxov w. acc.
Spes, Imagna
spes, peh. § dyad) éArts. Dem.
Immortalitas, d6avagia, as, j.
Pro, for, in behalf of itép w.
g67.
€Atris, ióos, ):
Patria, ratpis, tºos, j.
Offero, TpoſłóX\opal; se offerre,
éavröv Tpoğā\\eoréal, w, dat. of
that to which one exposes
himself.
Mors, 6&varos, ov, 6.
Forsitan, toros.
Miror, 6avpudića).
Do, dare, 6téopu.
Animus, 6vpués, où, 6.
Par, toos, m, ov.
Corpus, orópia, aros, Tó.
Facio, Trotéo, 6.
Qui, quae, quod, w. anteced. Omēt-
ted, §o rus, jtus, 6 tw.
Opto, are, étru6vpuéo, 6.
Oral Exercise.
1. El Totto Tpdºttet, caxós éxet—kaxós éet, Si hoc
facit, bene est–bene erit, If he does (or is doing) this, it
is well — it will be well.
LESSON VI. 4. 23
2. El Tooto Tpdffel, faxós éet, Si hoc faciet, bene erit,
If he does (or shall do) this, it will be well.
3. El Toºro èTpatte, caxós eixeu, Si hoc faciebat, bene
erat, If he did this, it was well (continued).
4. El Totto èTpače, KaNás éaxev, Si hoc fecit, bene fuit,
If he did this, it was well (simple past). The Latin may
also be rendered, if he has done, etc.
5. El Totto èTpatte, caxós àu etxev, Si hoc faceret,
bene esset, If he were doing this, it would be well.
6. El Totto èrpače, caxós àv éaxev, Si hoc fecisset,
bene fuisset, If he had done this, it would have been well.
7. 'Eau Toºro Tparty (continued or repeated), or éâv
Tooto Tpdān (simple fact, or completed action), caxós éðel,
Si hoc fecerit, bene erit (or fuerit), If he do (or shall do —
a probable event) this, it will be well.
8. El Tooto Tpatrot (continued), ei Totto Tpdéete
(simple fact), caxós &v čxot (continued), kaxios àu oxolm
(simple fact), Si hoc faciat, bene sit, If he should (hereafter)
do this, it would be well.
NoTE. The above are the principal forms of conditional sentences in
Greek and Latin.
To be Written.
1. They would not listen to a word, if any one should
wish to say anything else. (At some future time: el w.
optat, &v w, optat.) They did not listen to a word, if any
One wished to say anything else. (As some one might wish.
Ex. 1.) They would not listen to a word, if any one wished
to Say anything else. (At the present time: but no one
does wish it). 2. If they will consent to act worthily of
themselves, they will obtain some complete and great ad-
vantage. 3. If he will consent to act worthily of himself,
perhaps he might obtain some complete and great advan-
tage. 4. If he had been left to himself at least, he would
have perished long ago. 5. If they had been left to them-
24 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
selves at least, they would have perished long ago. 6.
They would not say we were the guests of Philip, unless
it is proper to call those who do anything for hire the
guests of those who hire them. 7. They would not con-
sent to take the field, unless Cyrus pays them in full. 8.
I should like to ask you to what party you wish to belong.
9. I for my part should like to ask those who especially
censure what has been done, to what party they would
wish us to belong. 10. It is not in keeping with the
character of the Athenians, if they have (the pay) to fail
to give (it) in full. 11. If the Athenians should be vic-
torious, whom would they slay? 12. Quid timeam, si
beatus futurus sum ? (Why should I fear, if, etc.) 13.
Nemo unquam, sine magna spe immortalitatis, se pro patria
offerret ad mortem (in Greek, imperf indic. W. &v). 14.
Forsitan haec illi mirentur (Perhaps they would, etc. Optat.
w. &v). 15. Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset
quod optabat (Had you given = if you had given to this
man a body equal to, etc. ei w aor indic, and āv W. aor.
indic.).
L E S S O N VII.
THE MOODS.
Conditional Sentences in Indirect DiSC0%rS6.
Feferences.
See especially PART I., LESSON XX.
GooD, $ 241,242, 247. RUH., § 345.
HAD., 733–738. CURT., §§ 525 – 529.
HAD. El., 501 – 504. CR., § 617.
KOCH, \\ 108, 109.
LESSON VII. 25
Examples.
1. "EXeffev Što el 6eoû fiv, oùk jv aloxpokepêſis,
"Eqm, el 6eoû fiv, oijk et v at aloxpokepôéa. -
He said that, if he (some third person) was (descended
from a god, he was not avaricious.
2. "EXešev Štt, el Tn Totto èg out o, tři ČM) bāNayya ka-
kov ša ot to (hereafter), -
"Edm, et Tºm Totto èa ot to, Tū &m baixayyu kakov ša e-
a 6 a v. He said that, if this should anywhere be (the
case), it would be a damage to the whole phalanx.
3. "EXefev Štt, ei Tept calvoi, Tuvos Tpdyaatos t poiſt -
3/ dero Aéyetv, Tºxey ãº, 5 * 3/
Eðm, et..... Tpowt (65 to Aéyeu, ÉT a xe ôv &v. He
said that, if it were proposed to speak about any
new affair, he would have waited.
NOTE. For the above sentences in oratio recta, see Lesson IV., Exam-
ples 3, 4, and 7.
y y 2 * ~ e / A 5
4. Excº ôTu, et plm oi ºbt)\6aoſhot 8a a t \e iſ a et a v, oùk
* * * f
et m caków TravXa Taºs TóAeatu,
"E 2 N £8 X. / 5 3. ºn
ºpm, et pum ..... 8 a q t \e iſ a et a v, oùic e i v at kaków
e -
kTé. He said, unless, etc., there would not be, etc.
y c/ / >y y 5 A.
5. "EXešev Štú Xapuu et a ot to, et dko iſot Te,
y / 3. g º
"Eóm xápov et a e a 6 a t, ei dico 60 vºte. He said that he
should be grateful if, etc.
2/ * º * * *
6. "Exegev Štt, ei dvaykalov elm dèukeiv h dēuketo 6al, éNot-
To &v uá\\ov déuketo 6at,
y * y gº \ *
"Edm, ei dvaykalov elm déuceiv # doukeia 6al, éAéa 6at àu
uáAAov déuketo 6at.
He said that, if it should be unavoidable, etc., he would
2 5
choose, etc.
NOTE. For Examples 4, 5, and 6, in oratio recta, see Lesson W., Exam-
ples 1, 3, 4. -
Vocabulary.
Say, \éyò usu. w. §rt or òs dº a finite (and a few forms of aor. 1, eitra),
mood; pmui, w, the infin. ; eitrov in the Sense to say, w. §rt or òs.
2
26
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Unavoidable, necessary, dvay-
Katos, a, ov.
NoTE. As the English words in
this exercise have occurred before,
they are not here repeated.
Desum, to be wanting, to fail,
éA\eitro (€v, Neitro).
Polliceor, intoxvéopat, oùplat;
w8w. w, infin. fut.
Audacter, 6appa)\éas (6dporos,
new Att. 6dppos).
Dico, Aéyò.
Volo, ä6é\a).
Voluptas, jöovſ, ms, j.
Ipse, airós, #, 6.
Pro, for the sake of, or instead
of, duri w. gen.
Loquor, NaNéao, 6, Aéyò.
Concedo, yxopéo, 6 (év, Xopéo).
Arbitror, jºyéopat, oùpal.
Dignitas, worth, virtue, détopia,
atos, Tó.
Vereor me, Šáðotka puff.
Dum velin, while I wish, ē6é-
Nov.
Minuo, uère, pºetów, 6.
Labor, Tóvos, ov, 6.
Augeo, ere,
müémora.
aúčávo, ačáñoro,
Oral Exercise.
1. "EXe:av Štt, ei Totto Tpétrot, ca)\ós &v éxot,
"Eqaaav, et Totto TpáTTot, caxós àu èyetv,
Dixerunt, si hoc faceret, bene futurum esse,
They said that, if he should do this, it would be well.
2. "Exeflav Štt, ei Toito Tpéčot, caxós éot,
"Eqaaav, el Totto Tpéčot, caxós éðelv,
Dixerunt, etc., Same as foregoing,
They said that, if he should do this, it would be well
(at some future time).
/ ya / º N 3.
3. "EXe£av ôtt, ei Totto èTpatte, caxós àu etxev,
y c/ o * 3/ * SN 3/
Eqaa’av Štt, et Towto éirpatte, caxós āv éxeuv,
Dixerunt, etc., same as Nos. 1 and 2.
They said that, if he did this, it would be well.
3/ e/ 2 * >/ fº 3\ >/
4. "EXešav Štu, et Totto èTpače, KaNés àu èaxev,
2/ • a 3/ *A ‘N *
Eqaaav, et Totto èTpače, kaxós àu axeſu,
Dixerunt, si hoc fecisset, bene futurum fuisse,
They said that, if he had done this, it would have been
well (supposition with contrary reality, past time).
NOTE. No examples of indirect sentences after the principal tenses are
here given, as the moods are unchanged. Often also after the historic
tenses the indirect sentence retains the original mood. – E. G.
LESSON VII. 27
5. "Hºrópovv tá Tote Néyet (st. Xäyot), I was at a loss what
in the world he meant (lit. what he means).
6. "Exeyov Štt Kūpos Téðunkev, They said that Cyrus was
dead (lit. is dead).
To be Written.
1. If he is (descended) from a god,” he will not be
avaricious. They say that, if he is (descended) from a god,
he will not be avaricious. 2. He said “ that if they were
(descended) from a god, they would not be avaricious. 3.
He says that, if,” avoiding this, he shall not mention the
things done by himself, he will not seem to have (or he
will not think he has) the ability to refute the accusa-
tions. 4. He said that, if, avoiding this, he should not
mention (hereafter) the things done by himself, he would
not seem (at some future time); to have the ability to
refute the accusations. 5. He said that, if, avoiding this,
he should not mention the things done by himself, he
would not seem to have the ability to refute the accusa-
tions. 6. They said “ that, if it were proposed to speak
concerning any new affair, they would wait—they would
have waited. 7. They say that, if * it is proposed to
speak concerning any new affair, they will wait. 8. They
said, unless the philosophers shall become kings, or the
kings philosophers, there will be no cessation of calamities
for states. 9. They said that, if the philosophers should
be kings, or the kings philosophers (at some future time),
there would be a cessation from calamities for states.
10. They say * they will be grateful, if * you will listen.
11. They said they would be grateful (at some future
time), if he would listen. 12. They said that, if it was
unavoidable to do wrong or to suffer wrong, they would
have chosen rather to suffer wrong. 13. He said that, if
it should be unavoidable (at some future time) to do wrong
Or to suffer, wrong, he would choose ; rather to suffer
28 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
wrong. 14. Se non defuturum (esse) pollicetur, si audac-
ter dicere velint. 15. Voluptatem si ipsa prose loquatur
concessuram arbitror Dignitati (I think that pleasure, if
she herself, etc., would yield (the palm), etc.). 16. Wereor
me dum minuere velim laborem augeam. -
* Express in two ways. t Less. W., Ex. 2. f. Optat. fut, without àv.
L E S S O N VIII.
MOODS IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
References.
GOOD., §§ 229 – 233. KüH., §§ 333, 337.
HAD., 755 – 761. CURT., §§ 551 – 558.
HAD. El., 521 – 524. CR., § 640 ft.
KOCH, §§ 117, 118.
Examples.
1. “A um of 8a, où8é o top at eiðéval. What I do not
Know, I do not even think I know (= if I do not know,
etc., -el W. indic, in protasis, and the indic, without àu in
apod).
2. ET e º 67 Toluvv Štro tº a a to Tiju eipſiumv Tóxts,
éut a 00 a TáNtv alcéraaffe Tă ăuðv ékárepos Tp oetxe to
Tpdºttetv. When, therefore, the city had made the peace,
then again consider what each of us chose to do (a tempo-
ral sentence w, indic, in both parts).
3. 4 e? Tows dyadows &vöpas éyxet peºv učv &taalu
del toſs caxoſs, thu dyadhu Tpoğax\opepovs éATôa, b é-
pet v 8 & T &v 66eos 8 v 86 yewvalos. It is necessary for
good men always to put their hands to all honorable deeds,
casting before them the good hope, and to bear nobly what-
ever God gives (= €div w. Subjunc. in cond, and the indic.
in conclusion).
LESSON VIII. 29
4. ‘Hvák’ &v tºs juás d 8 v kä, äueſs üTěp judov A a-
xo jue 6 a. When any one shall wrong you, we will fight
for you (temporal sentence = {div W. Subjunc. in condit.,
indic, in conclus.).
5. Oik &v čTexelpodpey TpdTTelu & p.m fit to t d ue 6 a.
We should not (then) be attempting to do what we did not
understand (= et w indic, in cond, and āv W. indic, in con-
clus). Less frequent than the other forms.
6. Oix Šo a €30 vX 6 we 6a, dAA 6a a 60 m to Tpdy-
aat’ &et Séxea.6at. It was necessary to accept, not all that
we wanted, but all that the situation granted (first clause,
a single definite fact ; Second clause, hypothetical and gen-
eral).
7. "Oa ovs a to 64 vot To étudpkovs kai dělkovs, 6s eſſ
&TAuguévows épogeiro. As many as he perceived to be per-
fidious and unjust, (these) he-used-to-fear as if they were
well armed (i. e. if he ever became aware that any persons
were perfidious, etc.).
8. ETetêm 88 duolyffeſm, eighelpev Tapa Tov ×okpárm.
And when (each morning) it (the prison) was opened, we
went in to Socrates.
9. Okuotmu &v eis Tà TNoía épéaivetv & julu 8offm. I
should be loath to enter into the boats which he might give
(=ei W. Optat. in cond, &v w, optat, in conclus).
Vocabulary.
Rnow, oièa. peace for one's self, Troteio'éat
Think, otopiat. eipſiumv.
When, in the sense after, étrévôň; Then, correl. of éiretóñ, évraúða.
w. Subjumc. *tretódv; at the time Again, TáAtv.
when, Öre ; w. Subjunc. &rav; Consider, okotréo, 6; also, okotréo-
at the exact time when, pat, oùpal, f orkéWropat, aor. £orke-
#vika ; w. Subjunc. juika čv. Wrápumv, Éorkeppat ; from Arist. On-
Therefore, accordingly, Toivuv. ward, orkotho co, ÉakóTmora KTé.
Peace, eipſium, ms, ii; to make Each, of two, Škárepos, a, ov; of
30
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
any number more than two, Éra-
OTTOS.
Choose,
Tpoalpéopat, oùpat; aor. Tpoet-
choose beforehand,
Aópumv.
Do, Tpárro; to do, to make
(80me particular thing), trouégo,
Totò; to do, to act (general),
Tparta).
Fight, pdxopat.
For, in behalf of, itép w. gem.
Bear, pépo.
Nobly, yeyvatos.
Attempt, put the hand to, Çy-
Xelpéo, ö, (év, Xeip).
TJnderstand, étriotapat.
Accept, receive, 8éxopat.
Want, wish, 80%Nopat ; to want,
be in need of, ask for, 8éopau.
All (the things) that, 60 a ; fr. Ögos,
7, ov.
The situation, the circum-
stances, affairs, Tpdypata, Tá.
Grant, give, ötöopat.
Prison, ôeapotíptov, ov, td.
Open, ävotyvvput ; also divoſyo ; later
dvotyvío.
Go in, eigeupt, usu, as fut.
To the presence of Tapá w. acc.
Socrates, Xokpárms, ovs, 6; acc.
>okpárm, or 20kpátmv.
To be loath, ēkvéo, 6.
Enter, embark, pſ3aiva, const.
eis w, acc. *
Non dubito, oùk dirokvéo (diró,
ôkvéo).
Dare operam, Troteio 6al or rovöſju.
Ut videam, Greek infim. ióeiv.
Cum, w. pres. Or fut., §tav w. Sub-
junc.
Satis commode, eis ka)\óv.
Possum, Śāvapal, subjunc. 80ywo-
pat (note the accent).
Qualis, oios, a, ov.
Animus, lºvyń, ms, i.
Nescio, oùk oièa.
Xerxes, Eépêms, ov, 6.
Praemium, puto 66s, où, 6, pay, re-
ward; 36Aov, ov, Tó, the prize of ,
a contest (of any sort), reward.
Propono, Tpotíðmut.
Qui, whoever, Šotus, frus, 6 re.
Invenio, eipiako.
Novus, katvös, #, Öv, new in kind,
'newly invented.
Voluptas, jôovň, fis, i.
Oral Exercise.
"Oora 8oºxetal, All that he wishes.
"Oora é8očxeto, All that he wished.
"Oora öv 80%xmtat, All that he may wish.
"Oora 800Aotto, All that he might wish (or simply, All
that he wished).
"O Te Tpdºrrel, Whatever he does.
"O Ti &rpattev, Whatever he was doing.
LESSON VIII. 31
"O Ti &v Tpartm, Whatever he may do. º -
"O tº Tpdtrol, Whatever he might do (or whatever he
"Oro èvrvyxãvel, Whomsoever he falls in with.
"Oro èvetøyxavey, Whomsoever he fellin with (repeated).
"Oro àu èvrvyxdum, Whomsoever he may fall in with.
"Oro èvrvyxdvoº, Whomsoever he might fall in with (at
any time) (or, Whomsoever he fell in with).
'ETelS) épxetat, When he is coming.
'ETretë) jet, When he came, or was coming.
'ETretë) #A6ev, When he came (simple fact).
'Ere.8āv ty, When he comes.
'ETretëm A601, When he came, or as often as he came.
To be Written.
1. What he did not know,” he did not think he knew.
2. When therefore the city made peace, then again you
used to consider what each of us chose + to do. 3. When
therefore the city has made the peace, then again you
will consider what each of us may choose to do. 4. When
any one wronged you,” we used to fight for you. 5. They
bore nobly whatever God gave.* 6. They would bear
nobly whatever God might give. 7. We should not (then)
be thinking we knew what we did not know (cf. Examp.
5). 8. I am not attempting to do what I do not under-
stand. 9. They will accept, not all that they may want,
but all that the situation may grant, 10. When the
prison has been opened, we will go in to the presence of
Socrates. When the prison was opened, they went in to
the presence of Socrates. 11. They are loath to enter into
the boats which he may give us. 12. When it is proposed
to speak about any new affair, he waits. When it was
proposed to speak about any new affair, he-used-to-wait.
13. When it was proposed to speak about any new affair,
he waited. They said that he waited, whenever it was
32 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
proposed to speak about any new affair. 14. Non dubitabo
dare operam ut te videam, cum id Satis commode facere
potero (I shall not hesitate to take pains to see you, when
J can, etc.). 15. Qualis sit animus, animus nescit. 16.
Xerxes praemium proposuit qui invenisset novam volup-
tatem.
**
* Express this in two ways, - as a particular, definite fact, and as gen-
eral, or hypothetical.
t Express as general, or hypothetical.
# Express as a particular instance.
L E S S O N IX.
MOODS IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES (continued).
IReferences.
GOOD., §§ 236 – 240. KüB., §§ 333, 337.
HAD., 710, c ; 771, 822. CURT., §§ 500, 551–558.
HAD. El., 522, 524. CR., §§ 558, a ; 640 – 642.
KOCH, \\ 117, 118.
Examples.
/ *
1. 4éopal Taxu, 6a7tep 6; dpxfts, &\\ov twos Aóyov,
ôs pe Te to et 6s toū d"Tobavòvros of avva"Toëvija ket fi
A tº -
alºvym. I again ask, just as at first, for some other argument
which shall convince me that the soul of the one who is
dead” does not die at the same time (or such as to con-
vince, etc. The relative denoting fitness).
2 T/ e/ > $6 3. N e * c/ 3. * &
. 1 vs ovtos evmtºms ea Tuv vuou, o a T is a y vo e º Tov
éiceſtev TóNepov Šešp ##ovta, āv duexia ouev; Who of you
is so simple as not to know that the war will come from
thence hither, if we are remiss? (or, that he does not know,
etc. The relat. denoting result).
\ N 5/. . ^ V A 2 - *
3. ſpadi Tàu đâu Tpos Tov Sea Tótmu eitreºu - 6avuao Tov
^ eM * * M > rv N / an \ N /
Totels, Ös juiv prev ow8év 8 69 s, Tó Sé cuvi Ae T a § {8 a s
oùnrep attos éxets a ſtov. They relate that the sheep said to
LESSON IX. 33
its owner, You do a strange (thing) in that you give nothing
to us, but share with the dog in the very food which you
yourself have (the relative denoting cause).
4. "Exeyov Štt #cotev fiyepidvas exovres, o' attoos
&#ovo v v čv6ev Ščov a v tá čtvrijöeta. They said that they
were come with guides who should conduct them (to a
place) from which they should have provisions (or to con-
duct them, etc. The relative denoting purpose).
5. Taüta étoiovv, p. éxp t a kotos éyév e To. They con-
tinued to do these things, until darkness came on.
6. IIepuévete, áo T' à v čN60. Wait till I come.
7. Mū āvapºelvoplew éos à v i TAetovs of Toxéutot juáv
. Yévout a t, dAA touev, Šos étu o iópe 6a eiterós àu
aúTóv kpatija'at. Let us not linger until our enemy become
more numerous than we (are), but let us go while we still
think we may easily conquer them.
8. IIeptepévouev čkdatore, éos d vot X6e in to Śeapo-
Tiptov. We stayed around on each occasion, until the prison
was opened (or should be opened).
9. Oük #6eXe Köpp eis xeipas iéval, Tp vi ä yvum
airov šare to ev. He was unwilling to go into the hands of
Cyrus, until his wife persuaded him (Tplv w. the indic).
10, Mū dréA6mte, T plvi ču dico iſ a mte. Do not go
away until you hear (Tpſv W. the subjunc).
11. Oik &v eiðelms Trpivf Telpaffeins. You would not
know until you had tried (it), or until you should have,
etc. (Tptu w, the optat.).
* Lit. of the one who died.
+ With éas, Čare, pºéxpt, and the subjunc., áv is sometimes wanting, as
in final sentences. Cf. Lesson III.
† Tp(v, until, in the sense S007wer than.
Vocabulary.
Ask for, Séopa w, gen. Argument, Adyos, ov, 6.
Just as, Öotrep. * Convince, persuade, reiða).
At first, Čá ápxms. That, declarative conjunc, &s.
2 X Ç
34
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Soul, lºvXń, ms, ii.
Die, diroðvíjorko; die with, die
at the same time, ovvatroëvil-
O KGO.
Foolish, simple, eúñóms, es.
Not to know, to be ignorant
of dyvoéo, ö, const, acc. w. par-
ticip.
From thence, ékeiðev.
Hither, Öeopo.
To be remiss, dueMédo, ö).
Strange, 6avpaorrós, #, 6v ; a
strange (thing), 6avpiaatóv.
Guide, #yepºv, Švos, 6.
With, particip. xov.
Conduct, àyo.
Provisions, Turň8eta, ov, Tá.
Wait, lit. stay around, Tepuévo;
wait, linger, lit. stay on, diva-
puévo.
Till, until, éos, Éote, pºéxpt; Tpiv
wsu, after negative sentence.
Share with, give a share of,
petaðiðapu, w, dat. § gen.
Food, oritos, ov, 6.
Enemy (collective), oi troAéutot.
More numerous, TAetovs=TAeto-
ves, comp. of troAſſº.
While, as long as, éos chiefly
w. pres. indic.
Still, yet, 3rt.
Easily, eúTerós.
Conquer, Kpatéo, ö, w, gen.
Linger, divapiévo.
Darkness, orkóros, ov, 6.
To come on, to become, yiyvo-
plat.
On each occasion, êkáo Tote.
To try, Treupéopal, Öpat; dep, pass.
or mid.
Mitto, Trépºro.
Qui, Ös, j, 6; Śarts, frts, 6 tw.
Consulo, consulere, divakovágo,
6, w, dat.
Apollo, inis, 'AtróA\ov, ovos, 6.
Senex, 'yāpov, ovros, 6.
Sero, serére, pvreto, eúgo.
Arbor, & arbos, arbóris, Šēvôpov,
ov, Tó.
Alter, àN\os, m, o.
Seculum, yewed, as, i.
Prosum, prodesse, ópexéo, ö,
Q/Sºl. 20. ClCC.
Nemo, neminis, oièeis, oióepia,
où8év.
Tam, oùro, before a vowel otros;
tam senex, qui, oùro yépav (or
Tpeogărms), āortus.
Non, in a sentence denoting pur-
pose or result, puff.
Puto, äre, otopiat.
Annus, évvavrós, où, 6.
Nam, yāp.
Innocentia, ae, drakia, as, j. ,
Affectio, önis, Tá60s, ovs, Tó; af-
fectio talis, quae, Tá60s rotov-
tov, otov.
Noceo, ere, 3Åáttro, w, acc.
Oral Exercise.
1. Oºk #6exe Tpiv #kovaev, He was not willing, until he
heard.
Oük &v é66\ot Tpiv dicoſa'elev, He would not be willing,
until he should hear.
LESSON IX. 35
Mà éðexe Tpiv &v dicotſaps, Do not consent, until you
hear. -
2. "Eos (éate, uéxpt) #x0ev, Until he came.
"Eos (gate, uéxpt) Adol,” Until he came (or might
come).
"Eos (gate, uéxpt) &v Aën, Until he come, or has come.
3. Aéopal &\\ov Adyov Šs pie Telaet, I ask for another
argument, which (such as) shall convince me.
Ośros eimóms éa Tív, Šarts dyvoet, He is so foolish as
not to know (or that he does not know).
6avgaarov Totel, Ös juiv ow8év Štěp, He does a strange
(thing), in that he gives nothing to us.
"Hicovalv jyepudvas exoutes, di muds āšovatv, They are
come with guides to conduct us (or, who will con-
duct us).
NOTE. Note carefully the various uses of the relative pronoun, denot-
ing fitness, result, cause, purpose, and the various ways in which it may
be rendered.
4. "Eos étt oióueða, While we still think.
"Eos étu gºdpeba, While we still thought.
* Often denotes indefinite frequency.
To be Written,
1. He again asked, just as at first, for some other argu-
ment which should convince * him that the soul of the one
who is dead does not die-at-the-same-time. 2. They were
So foolish, as not to know that the war would come hither
from thence, if they were remiss. 3. They do a strange
(thing), in that they ask for some other argument, which
shall convince them that the soul of the one who is dead
does not die-at-the-same-time. 4. He is come with guides
to conduct + them (to a place) from which they shall have
provisions. 5. If you will wait till I come, I will share
with you in the food which I myself have. 6. Having
Waited till I came, they shared with me in the food which
* 36 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
they themselves had. 7. We will not linger until the
enemy become more numerous, but will go while we still
think we may easily conquer them. 8. They did not
linger till the enemy became more numerous, but went
while they still thought they might easily conquer them.
9. If you had lingered until darkness came on, you would
not easily have conquered the enemy. 10. It is necessary
to wait on each occasion until the prison is opened. 11.
We will wait, while the prison is opening (is being opened),
if we may go in to the presence of Socrates. 12. They
would not know until they had tried. They will not know
until they have tried. They did not know until they tried.
13. Missi sunt qui consulerent Apollinem, 14. Senex
serit arbores, quae alteri seculo proSint. 15. Nemo est
tam senex, qui se annum non putet posse vivere. 16.
Nam est innocentia affectio talis animi, quae noceat nemini
(For innocence is such a quality of mind as to, etc.).
* Fut. optat. Cf. Lesson VII. t Relative clause.
L E S S O N X.
MOODS IN THE EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
* References.
GOOD., § 251. KÜH., § 259, 3, (b); & Rem. 6.
HAD., 721, 753, 834, 870, c. CURT., §§ 514, 515, 614.
HAD. El., 489, 570. CR., § 638.
KOCH, S 105, 6 & 8.
1Examples.
an gº * /*
1. Min öfft’, Träutes 6eoff, a mêels Taü6' ju6v čT v we 5-
5 ^ / * ,” / \ * N
a et ev, d\\d. AdXuota kai Towtots 8extto Tuva votiv Kal
ºppévas āv 6e in Te. May * no one of you, O all ye gods !
Sanction these things; but above all, put even in these men
Some better mind and heart.
LESSON X. 37
2. Tſ obv, & kardpat’, Šuoi Tepe Towtov Motöopeſ, kal
Néyets & a oi kai Toſs o'ots of 6 e o T p & J et a veis kebaxâv
Why, then, O accursed one, do you revile me for these
things, and speak of those things which may the gods
turn on your head, and on (the heads of) your (accom-
plices)
3. (20 yap &ceivovs aroðval kai katop660 at advo Ta
8tépépév, oùros kai Tabávrov & A fit ot’ & ‘be Nov f Tijs
ūrép d"Tavrov Nºrms TXeſatov pletetxev. For (the man)
whom it especially concerned that they should come off in
Safety, and with success, this man, when they had even suf-
fered what I could wish they had never (suffered), shared
most largely in the grief for all. f
4. Mii uot ye vow 0 & 800Aou', dAN & a vubépet. May”
not those things which I wish, but those which are profita-
ble, fall to my lot.
5. Eł6', 3 Aðate, at Totoitos àu thixos fiatu yevo to.
Would that you, O most excellent man, being such a per-
son, might become a friend to us! /
6. Eł6e arol t0re avveyevéumu. O that I had then met
with you !
7. 'AAA' & beve Kūpos (fiv. Would that Cyrus were
alive tº
8. Oluok, tú 8pdao; uſin or 34 exov xvireºv Tây Skú-
pov. Woe is me ! what shall I do º O that I had never
left Scyrus !
9. Ei yüp Togatºrmv Ščvauw eixo v. O that I had so
much power
10. *ſ, Taº, yevoto Tatpos eūtvYéa repos. O child, may *
you become more fortunate than your father
* Observe that the optative in wishes is often rendered by the English
7770.4/, etc.
t Sc. Taffeiv, suggested by tra66vrov. The infin. would need to be ex-
pressed with dºeNov, taken out of this connection.
38
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Vocabulary.
Sanction, êtweijo (Éiri, veðo), to
nod assent to.
To put or place in, Čvrièmpu.
Mind & heart; voi's kai ºppéves
are not easily distinguished in .
meaning; but may perhaps be
thus rendered.
Turn, Tpétro.
Head, kepaká, is, j.
Suffer, Táoyo.
Share in, participate in, pueréxo
(pieté, éxo) w. gen.
Grief, Aëtrm, ms, j.
To profit, to be profitable, orvp-
‘pépo.
To fall to one's lot, yiyvopat w.
dat.
Such, Totooros, m, o, or ov.
Meet with, ovyytyvouat w, dat.
Then, at that time, Tóre.
Live, be alive, Čáco, Có.
Fortunate, eúrvXàs, is; comp.
-éo repos, sup. -éotaros. -
Possess, Éxo.
So much, Toorooros, m, o, or ov.
Leave, \etaro.
Scyrus, or Skyrus, Skúpos, ov, j.
Utinam, etée, or el yáp.
Possum, Śāvapai.
Conatum, Telpa, as, j.
Efficio, Tite)\éo, 6.
Falsus, revöſis, és.
Vates, pudurus, eas, 6.
Nevere, pi) d\méós.
Scribo, ypáq6).
Oral Exercise.
1. IIdaxon év, He might (or would) be suffering.
IIda'xot, May he be suffering !
"Ezraayev čv, He might (or would) be suffering (but is
not).
Eiðs (or el yūp) &rarxeu, O that (or would that) he
might be suffering (a wish that cannot be fulfilled).
2. IIdêot àv, He might (or would) suffer.
IIdéot, May he suffer
"Eraðey &v, He might (or would) have suffered (but did
not)
Eł9e graffev, O that (or would that) he had suffered (a
wish contrary to the reality).
3. Oik &v Trä6ot, He might (or would) not suffer.
Mi, Tabot, May he not suffer.
Oüc àu Traffev, He might (or would) not have suffered
(if something had happened which did not happen).
LESSON X. 39
Eiðe (or el yap) an étaðev, O that he had not suffered
or would that, etc (but he did suffer).
4. "ſlºbexe Táoxetv, O that he were suffering
"ſlºbeXe Taffeiv, O that he had suffered
Mà épéAe Taoxetu, O that he were not suffering
Mà épéAe Taffeiv, O that he had not suffered (Wishes
implying contrary reality.)
5. M.) diſhexov Tatra étivečew, O that they were not sanc-
tioning these things
Mū āghexov Taota Tuveiaat, O that they had not sanc-
tioned these things.
To be Written.
1. O all ye gods ! would that * no one of you had sanc-
tioned these things; would that you had put even in these
(men) some better mind and heart 2. Would that the
gods had turned these things on your head and (on the
heads of) your (accomplices) 3. O that they had never
suffered these things O that they were not suffering +
these things 4. O that Cyrus had never suffered these
things O that Cyrus were not suffering these things
5. May they not suffer these things, nor share in the grief
for all ! 6. O that those things which were profitable,
and not those things which I wished, had fallen to my lot
7. O that you, being such (a person), had become a friend
to me! O that you, being such (a person), were a friend
to me! 8. Would that they might then meet with us
Would that they had then met with us 9. Would that
they had not suffered these things, and were alive 10.
May the child never suffer these things, and may he become
more fortunate than (his) father, 11. Would that he had
never possessed so much power 12. He would never {
have possessed so much power, if he had not $ left Scyrus.
13. He would never possess so much power. May he
never possess so much power. 14. Utinam possem. Uti-
40 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
nam potuissem. 15. Utinam conata efficere possem. 16.
Falsus utinam vates sim. 17. Illud utinam ne vere scri-
berem.
* “Would that ” and “O that ” are rendered into Greek by eige, el yáp,
or &geXov; or sometimes by effe, or el yáp prefixed to dºeNov.
t Pres, infin. Tráq-Kelv.
f Apodosis of a conditional proposition, neg, où.
§ Protasis, neg. ºff.
L E S S O N XI.
MOODS IN EXHORTATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS.
References.
GooD., §§ 252 – 254. KÚH., § 259, 1, 4, 5.
HAD., 720, 723, 833. CURT., §§ 509, 510, 518.
HAD. El., §§ 487, 488, 492, 570, CR., § 628.
Koch, $ 105, 2, 4. •
Examples.
1. El 8 &p' yovatv dutdros, Toºrows usu attoºs kaff
éavrovs éé6\ets kai TpoćNets v yi, kal 6axáttú trot ii-
a are, jutu 8é toſs Aotºroſs Tāv taxlotmy drax\aſymv Tów
étmptnuévov $68ov 66te kai a ormoſav ća baxi. But if,
as is likely, they are incorrigible, render these, alone by
themselves, utterly ruined on land and sea; but to us
who remain, grant the speediest release from the impending
fears and a safe deliverance.
2. Töre Toivvu Tà uèv ćueX\ev, Ös éðūket, Tóv Šetvöv,
Tà. 8 #öm Tapfiv, u oſs Tāv Tpoatpea v pov a köTe º Tàs
Toxiteias, un Tà avg|3dvta a v ko p div Tet. At that time,
therefore, some of the perils were impending, as it seemed;
but others were already present, in which look attentively
at my plan of administration, be not perpetually complain-
ing of what has happened. -
LESSON XI. 41
3. M7, 8) Toºro às dölkmua Šuov 6 fis, ei kpatha at
avvé8m pi\tºrtº) tº paym. Do not set this down as a
crime of mine, if it happened to Philip to conquer in
battle.
4. Kai uov p.m.8 el's Tàu Ütrepòoxºv 6 a vu do n, dAA&
per eivotas 6 Aéyo 6eopm a d to. Let no one wonder at .
my extravagant assertion, but let him observe with can-
dor what I say. -
5, 6 edia a a 6e Toivvu 6s a affpdv, Ös éoticeu, Éatt (bùael
Tāv š +t àv an Šukaios i Terpayuévov. Behold, therefore,
how rotten, as it seems, is everything by nature, which has
not been done justly.
6. Növ to u e v kai dico iſ a o ue v Tod divöpós, òretta
dicotia aures kai äNAots d va ko two a 6 we 6 a. Now let us
go and listen to the man; then, after hearing (him), let us
confer with others also.
7. Mm direxſ, Tov Xóyov Kata\etropaev. Let us not pro-
ceed to abandon the argument (while it is) incomplete.
8. Pépe 8m kai Tàs Tóv Newtowpywów paptupias, &v
Xexeºtotpymka, Čutu dvayvá). Come, now, and let me read
to you the testimonies of the public services which I have
performed.
- Vocabulary.
Render, make, Trotéa). Fear, pó60s, ov, 6.
To be incorrigible, éxeuv dută- Look-attentively-at, inspect,
TGOS. orkotéo, 6, fut, a kélropat, aor.
Utterly ruined, ééó\ms kai Tpoć- éorkeräumv, etc.
Ams. Plan, Tpoaipeoſts, eos, i.
On land and sea, ćv yi, kal 6a- Administration, troXu'reta, as, j,
Adtrim. To be-perpetually-complain-
Those who are left, oi \otirot. ing, ovkoçhavtéo, 6.
Speedy, taxós, eſa, ć; comp. 64t- What has happened, ta ovu-
tov; Sup. Táxtortos. Bávra (avg|3alvo).
Release, dira)\\ayń, me, j (dira)\- To set, put, set down, t{émpt.
Aárro). Crime, unjust act, döikmua, aros,
Impend, étrapráopal, Öpal. ró. s
42
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Wonder at, 6avpuéčo.
Extravagant assertion, itrepôo-
Aff, fis, i.
Observe, 6eopéo, ö). ©
Candor, eúvoia, as, ); with candor,
per eivotas.
Behold, 6edopal, Öpiat.
Rotten, oraépás, 4, 6v.
How (as relat. adv.), Ös.
Nature, pāorus, eos, j; by nature,
q)`joret.
Justly, Śukaios (Öikatos, a, ov).
Do, perform, trpátto.
It seems, Éouke(v).
Come, come now, ºpépe, ºpépe 8ff:
w8ed as interjection, without re-
gard to the number or person of
the verb which follows. So also
âye, té.
Read, dvayuyvögſko.
Testimony, paprupia, as, j.
Public service, Newtowpyia, as, j.
Perform-a-public-service, Aet-
towpyéo, 6.
Man, Bat, vir, dump, divöpós, ò.
Abandon, leave behind, kara-
Neitro.
Argument, Nóyos, ov, 6.
Incomplete, áre)\ffs, és (a priv.
TéAos).
Percontãtor, Öris, 6 troXvirpáy-
plov, ovos.
Fugio, öre, pet yao, w, acc. of pers.
or thing ; also in other construc-
tions.
Nam, yāp postp.
Garrulus, ToMöAoyos, ov, (ToMás,
A6 yos).
Idem, 6 airós, #, 6.
Impius, a, um, doeſłffs, és (a
priv. oré8opia).
Ne, piñ.
Audeo, Ére, to)pudo, 6.
Placo, äre, pa)\dooro, -trao, w, acc.-
(uaxakós, #, 6v).
Donum, Óðpov, ov, Tó.
Ira, Öpyń, fis, i.
Deus, 6eós, où, 6.
* Oral Exercise.
1. M.) ovkoºdutet, Be not in the habit of complaining.
Mà avkoſhavrijays, Do not complain (or find fault).
Mmöels avkoſhavretto, Let no one be in the habit of
complaining.
t;
'Mmöéis avkoſhavrijam, Let no one complain.
5 / 2 /
2. 'Akoúopiev, akova opew.
N A. *
Mm dicotopeu Toi) divöpós.
N , ) Af * y /
Mm dicotia ouev Tot, divěpás.
3. Let us be in the habit of acting justly.
Let us act justly.
Let us not be in the habit of acting unjustly (döſkos).
Let us not act unjustly.
LESSON XI. 43
4. Mm6év ćyav (se. Šato), Let nothing be in excess.
Tvóði aavtåv. Yūyvooke aavtåv.
Twówev juás attoºs, ytyvágicoptev juás attois.
Ne quid nimis, Ne plus ultra (um TAetov čáo).
5, Mm 6avuage, am 6avudays.
Mà 6avudſouev, um flavpda'opew.
dépe 6i, tas paptuplus duayvö.
bépe &m, Tås uapTupias duayópev.
6. Mn dreaſ, Tov Adyov cataAetirete.
Mi) drewſ, Tov \dyov cataAirmte.
"AAAots dualcolvöueða.
"AAAots dualcolvoa dºueta.
7. XzóTet, aſké!ºat, a comreite, a céraaffe.
Mm akóTet, an orkélem. -
Mn alcotetre, um a kerma 6e.
To be Written,
1. Let us render those who are incorrigible utterly
ruined on land and sea; and let us give to those who are
left the speediest release from the impending fears. 2.
Let us look attentively at his plan of administration; let
us not be perpetually complaining of what has happened.
3. Would that you were not perpetually complaining of
what has happened. 4. Look-attentively—at * my plan of
administration: do not complain of * what has happened.
5. Be not in the habit of setting this down as a crime of
mine, if the enemy conquer in battle. 6. O that you
would not set this down as a crime of mine, if it happens
to the enemy to conquer in battle! 7. Do not wonder at
my extravagant assertion, but observe with candor what
I Say. 8. Be not in the habit of wondering at my extrav-
agant assertion, but of observing with candor what I say.
9. Let us not wonder at his extravagant assertion, but
observe with candor what he says, 10. O that they
44 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
would behold how rotten is everything by nature which
has not been done justly 11. Let him behold how rotten,
as it seems, is everything by nature which has not been
done justly. 12. Come now, let us read the testimonies
of the public services which he has performed. 13. Be
not in the habit of listening to the man. Do not listen to
the man. 14. Be not in the habit of abandoning the argu-
ment (while it is) incomplete. Do not abandon the argu-
ment (while it is) incomplete. 15. Percontatorem fugito,
nam garrulus idem est (Avoid the “interviewer,” for, etc.).
16. Impius me audeto placare donis iram deorum.
* AOrist. -
L E S S O N XII.
THE INFINITIVE.
References.
GooD., §§ 258–260; 134, 2; 136, KOCH, S 119.
Note 2. KüB., §§ 305, 306, 307.
HAD., 763, 764, 773, 774, 775. CURT., §§ 560, 563, 567 – 570.
HAD. El., §§ 526, 527, 535, 536. CR., § 663–667.
Examples.
1. "Ap' oto 6’ 3rt vöv učv a rivat, a v vex 6 e?v, &va-
Tve to a t, Toxxa pia huépa kai 600 kal Tpets &oa'av Tów
eis ootmpſaw tº TóAet, .... ; Do you know that now (as
the facts have actually been), one day, and two, and three
gave (the opportunity) to stand, to rally, to take breath,
(gave) many of those things contributing to the safety of
the city. ... (infin, as obj) 2 -
2. T âv, et Tou Tàs X6pas Tairo Toàro Tá60s avvé8m,
Tp o a 60 kha at Xphy; What would it be proper to expect,
if this same calamity had happened somewhere within our
LESSON XII. 45
territory (infin, as subj. ; to expect what would be proper,
etc.)?
3. Eita orodičeral, kai ºngº Tp o a ſiket v, hs of coffew
#ket' yovtes 66&ms Trept adov due A fia a t. Then, he plays
the Sophist, and affirms that it is suitable to disregard the
opinion concerning us with which you came from home
(infin. as subj, of another infin. ; to disregard, etc., is suit-
able).
4. Eyð wouléo Tov wet, ei, T a 0.6 vt a 8 e?v u ep vº-
a 6 at Tavra Tov xpovov, To v 8é To tria a vºt a eū6üs ét t-
NeX fio 6 at , et Set Tov prev xpmatov, Tov be un uukpokº-
xov To tet v špyov &v0p6trov. I am of the opinion that the
one who has received a favor ought to remember (it)
through all time; but that the one who has done a favor
ought to forget it immediately, if it is proper that the one
do a deed of a noble man and the other a deed of a man
who is not little-souled (infin. w. Subj, acc.).
5. "Hyetro yap airóv Škaotos oixi Tô Tarpi kai Tà
puntpi udvov yeyev fio 6 at , d\\a kai Ti, Tarpið. For each
of them considered that he had been born, not to his father
and his mother only, but also to his country (infin. W. Same
subj, as the governing verb).
6. ‘Ouoxoye's oiv Tepe épé à8, kos y eyev fia 6 at ; Do
you then acknowledge that you have been unjust toward
me (infin. W. same subj, as the governing verb and pred. in
nom.) 2
7. ‘Tºrtoxveiro be airó, et éx6ot, bivov airtov Kūpo
Trotſiaev, 6v attos éðm ºperto èavrò wou get v tís Ta-
Tptôos. And he promised him, if he would come, to make
him a friend to Cyrus, whom he said he himself considered
better to himself than his country (infin, w, same subj, as
governing verb and adj. pron, in nom.).
8. Kai Tap ois étrexelped TpoTeiſelv bºx{q, 8, a 3d AA ov
Tois Tpºtovs toūtovs Øero Seſv k Tria a a 6 at (infin. depend-
ing on the impers, infin. (8eiv), w, same subj, as the leading
46
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
verb (§ero) and pred. (8tağāAXov) in nom.). And with
whomsoever he attempted to be first in friendship, these he
thought it necessary to acquire by calumniating those (who
were) first.
Vocabulary.
Stand, the perf, plupeif., 2 aor., &
fut. perf. of to Tmut.
Rally, ovvépxopat.
Take breath, divatvéo (āvá, Tvéo).
It is necessary, Öst impers.
It is proper, Xph.
Expect, Tpoorêokáo.
Calamity, Tráðos, ovs rô.
Somewhere within, Troö (enclit.)
w. gén.
Territory, country, Xópa, as, i.
Receive a favor, eú Tráoxø.
Ought, it is necessary, Öeſ.
Through, of time, the acc. case.
Time, Xp Óvos, ov, Ö.
To be of an opinion, to con-
sider, iryáopat, fiyotpat.
Perform, Trotégo, 6.
Noble, Xpmotós, #, 6v.
To play the sophist, oropičopal.
It is suitable, trpoojket.
Disregard, dueMédo, 6.
Opinion, Šáča, ms, j.
From home, oiko6ev.
To be born, yiyvouai.
Only, puduov.
But also, d\\& kai.
Acknowledge, Špoxoyéco, 6.
Affirm, 'pmui, particip. pſio.kov.
Unjust toward,áðukos treptw.acc.
Better, kpetrtov.
Acquire, któopat, któplat.
Calumniate, 6taSāA\co. .
Possess (perf. of kráopal), kékrm-
plat. -
To be first, Tporeſa (Tpatos, m,
ov).
With, by the side of trapá.
Cato, önis, Károv, avos, 6.
Quam, #.
Videor, Šokéo, 6.
Bonus, dyadós, #, 6v.
Malo, pāN\ov BoüAopal.
Vinco, vukáco, 6.
Scio, Trío rapat.
Hannibal, àlis, 'Avviðas, a, 6.
Victoria, vikm, ms, j.
Utor, Xpáopal, Öpaw, w, dat.
Nescio, oùk étriotapat.
Timoléon, tis, Tupoxéov, ovtos, 6.
Diligo, q},\éco, 6.
Metúo, lºo&éopat, oùpat; metúor,
I am feared, am an object of
dread, poſłepós eipt.
Oral Exercise.
1. Alpetárepôv éatt caxós d To 6 a ve?v à ºðv ataxpºs,
It is preferable to die nobly rather than to live (continue
living) in disgrace.
LESSON XII. 47
2. Où Đmoſt £fiv ataxpós, He denies that he is living
disgracefully (he says of £6 atoxpós, I am not, etc.).
3. Où Đmoſt ºria e i u aloxpós, He denies that he will
live disgracefully (he says oi, ºgo cré.). -
4. Oč (bmat 3e3 to keva º alaxpós, He denies that he
has lived disgracefully (he says of 868toka cré.).
5. Où (bmat 806 v at alo Após, He denies that he lived
disgracefully (he says oik Stov cré).
6. "Edºm Totto To teºw, He said he was doing this.
7. "Edm Totto To via et v, He said he was about to do
this (or, intending to do this; or, on the point of doing
this).
8. "Edm Totto Te Town k vat, He said he had done
this (he said, Tooto Tetroënka).
9. "Eºm Touro To vija at, He said he did this (or had
done this) (he said, Totto èTotmaa).
10. ‘Ouoxo'yeſ & 8 ticos e i vat, He confesses that he is
unjust (he confesses, āöukós elut).
11. ‘Ouoxo'yeſ & 8 ticos y eyevº, a 6 at, He confesses that
he has been (has become) unjust (he confesses, ā8tkos yeyé.
vmaal). -
12. ‘Ouoxoſyet & 8 wicos yewea flat, He confesses that he
was (became) unjust (he confesses, āčukos éyévôumv).
13. BoöAetal épyeo 6al, He wishes to be going.
14. BoöAetal éA6eiv, He wishes to go.
15. Kexeiet gé un pxeoffat.
16. Kexeijet aſe pum éA6eiv.
To be Written.
1. They affirmed that they themselves gave (the oppor-
tunity) to stand, to rally, to take breath. 2. We affirm
that it is necessary that we ourselves give (the opportunity)
to stand, to rally, to take breath. 3. What do we suppose
it would be proper that we ourselves expect, if this same
48 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
calamity happen somewhere within our territory? 4.
Those who have received favors ought to remember (them)
through all time, but those who have conferred (favors),
to forget (them) immediately. 5. If those who have re-
ceived favors remember (them), and those who have done
(favors) forget (them) immediately, we are of the opinion
that they perform an act of noble men. 6. They played
the Sophist, when they affirmed that it was suitable to
disregard the opinion concerning them with which we
came from home. 7. Let us not consider that we have
been born to our fathers and mothers only, but also to our
country. 8. Do not acknowledge that you have been
unjust toward him. 9. O that they would acknowledge
that they have been unjust towards us! 10. They affirmed
that they themselves considered the Athenians better to
themselves than their country. 11. They thought it
necessary to acquire these things by calumniating those
possessing (them). 12. Do not attempt to be first in
friendship with me by calumniating those who are first.
13. Cato esse quam videri bonus malebat. 14. Vincere
scis, Hannibal, victoria uti nescis. 15. Timoleon maluit
se diligi quam metui (Timoleon preferred that he should
be loved, etc.).
I, E S S O N XIII.
THE INFINITIVE (continued).
References.
GooD., §§ 261, 262, 264. KöH., §§ 306, (d), 308.
HAD., 767, 778, 779 – 782. CURT., §§ 562, 563, 573, 574.
HAD. El., 530, 533. CR., §§ 663–665.
ROCH, §§ 120, 5; 121.
LESSON XIII. 49
Examples.
1. Kai unvei To co Núa at Tiju Töv "EXXijvov kolvo-
viav ćiretpáketv ćyo Pixtºrto, ool to u; a tºy fig at Aot-
Trov fiv, dAN& 80 a v kai 60 a u apt iſ peo 6 at kal 6 m Wo ºu
Tovtovará. And further, if I had sold (it) to Philip to hinder
the union of the Greeks, it was left to you, not to keep
silence, but to cry aloud, and to bear witness to it, and to
make it plain to these (citizens).
2. ‘Opów ôtt Täs attias kai Tàs 8tašoxds, ais ék to 5
Tp 6 Tepos A éye tu ô Šudikov toxſet, oùk évi Tó ºbeiſyout
Tapex.6eiv, et um Tóv Šukačvtov čcao Tos judov .... to Tob
Xéyoutos jatépov Šikata evolcós Tpoa begetat. Seeing that
it is not possible for the defendant to escape the calum-
nious accusations (lit. accusations and calumnies) in which
the prosecutor is strong from the fact that he speaks first;
unless each of you judges shall receive with favor the just
(statements) of the one speaking last.
3. Eis toū6 fixeu ävatóetas Šat érópa X 6) et v Ós āpa
éyò Tpos T & Tàs eipſiums at T to s yeyev'ſ a 6 at Kai keko-
Xvkos emu Tàu TóNºv peta colvoi, ovvebplov Tów ‘Exxi-
vov airi)w Tot ſo a o 0 at. He arrived at such a pitch of
impudence that he dared to declare that I, forsooth, in ad-
dition to having been a cause of the peace (with Mace-
donia), even prevented the city from making peace with a
public council of the Greeks.
5 4. To yap tº. a taxvvºival, & airica * éuot,
ééexey Yörjo out at Épygo, Étrévôāv pumö Too Tuobv batvapat
êe two s \ yet v, Touré pot €80&ev airóu dvalaxvutótatov
eiva t, et um āpa êe two v caxoja w of Tot A éye ww Tov
Täxmóñ Néyovra. For that they were not ashamed, because
they will immediately be practically refuted by me, since
I shall appear to be eloquent in no manner whatsoever,
this seemed to me to be most unblushing on their part ;
unless, perhaps, they call him who speaks the truth elo-
Quent.
3 D
50 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
5. Auðrt & Avalau Tàs a Tovčás, Tås airčas Tpoéypalºa
TpóTov kai Tàs Stadopds, to 0 wift Tuva &nt fig at Tote éé
&rov too offtos TóNeuos Toſs"EXAmat catéatm. And I have
in the first place described the charges and the differences
which led to the breaking of the treaty (lit. on account of
which they broke the treaty), to the end that no one may
ever search for (the occasion) from which so great a war
arose (lit. became established) to the Greeks.
6, Mévov jºyd WAeto Tô fatatav Štíva a 6 at, T &
TX do a a 6 at levöm, Tó (pixovs 6t a yeX a v. Menon glo-
ried in being able to deceive, in fabricating falsehoods, in
deriding friends.
7. IIpoeirov Tatra to 0 ui, Nûe tu èveka Tàs a Trovãds.
They proclaimed these things, to the end that they might
not break the treaty.
Vocabulary.
Sell, Toxéo, ö, f, diroöðoropat, aor.
dTeóðumu. pf Tétrpaka, plupf
étrettpáketu (see Lea, Tuttpdorko).
Hinder, kao)\to.
Union, Kouvovia, as, i.
Left, Nourós, à, 6v.
Cry aloud, 8odø, 6.
Make plain, SmNógo, 6.
Is possible, évéorti, Évt; was pos-
sible, évijv. -
Defendant, 6 pečyov, ovros.
Escape, pass along by, Tapép-
Xopat.
Calumnious accusations, lit.
accusations and calumnies,
airias kai Šuabo)\ds.
Prosecutor, Ó Suðkaov, ouros.
To be strong, taxóo.
First, when used of two per-
sons, trpórepos, a, ov.
Cause of, airtos, ia, tow, w, gen.
With, participating with, perá
20, gén.
Public, kouvös, j, 6v.
Council, ovvéðptov, ov, Tó.
To be ashamed, aio Xúvopal.
Declare, Aéyo.
Immediately, aitika.
Practically, Épyg; dat. of pyov,
2.
Ov, TO.
Refute, ééeXéyxo.
Appear, paivopal.
Eloquent, Setvös Aéyetv (terrible,
or powerful to speak).
In any manner whatsoever,
ôToaſtwoov; w, a meg., in no man-
ner whatsoever. -
Call, name, ka)\éco, 6.
Truth, true things, TáNmóñ=T&
dAméi).
*
TIESSON XIII.
51
Because, órt.
Fabricate (for one's self), TAda-
oropat, TAétropiat.
Falsehoods, false things, revöm,
fr. revöſis, és. -
Deride, 6taye)\áo), 6.
Unblushing, shameless, divat-
O Xvutos, ov. -
Glory, dyá\\opat; act, dyá\\a), to
adorn, to deck.
Break (a treaty), Aña).
Treaty, otrovöaí, óv, ai; a trovöſ,
a libation.
Proclaim, say beforehand, Tpó-
q\mpt, f. Tpoepā, aor. Tpositrov.
That, to the end that, too w. acc.
& infin.
Search for, Čntéo, 6.
So great, Tooroúros, m, oGu).
Arise, become established, ka-
6to rapal & intrans, tenses of the
ClCt.
Scribo, ypáqiao.
Dico, Aéyò.
Diligenter, ius, issime, dºpišás,
éotepov, Éotata. -
Facile, ius, illime, figötos, jãov,
fiáota.
Scio, w, acc. & infin, oièa w, acc.
& particip. For scio w. infin.,
see Lesson XII.
Magna pars, 6 roºts, as partitive
agreeing in gender w, the gen. of
the whole.
Eruditio, pudémous, eas, i.
Rerum vocabula, Tà Tóv čvrov
ðvápara.
Oral Exercise.
1. 'Etta Taa’at ve?v ; Do you know how to swim 2
Oük étriotapal ve?v kai yüp oëTote épabov, I do not
know how to swim ; for I never learned.
2. Aetvös éatt X. Šy et v ; Is he eloquent
IIávv Šetvös X 6 yet v, He is very eloquent.
Aetvös éatt ºf a yet v ; Is he a great eater ?
IIávv Šetvos q, a yeºv, He is a very great eater.
3. Airm ñ oikia jötatr Čativ čvöv at Tā a 6 a t, This house
is most agreeable to live in.
Airm ñ yvy) eitpetrºs éattv iêe?v, This lady is most
Comely in appearance.
4. 'Op a v at vyvos ºv kai Tà bouñ Tpaxºs, He was gloomy
in looks and harsh in voice.
"ſłpa juiv 8 ovXe 6e a 6 at, It
counsel.
is time for us to take
5. To pumöéva èë a Tata v, The fact that no one deceives.
52 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Tot, ambéva é; a + at à v, To the end that no one may,
et C.
To pumöéva è? a rat ā v čveka, To the end that, or in
order that, etc.
'Ec toº pºmbéva è; a T at a v, From the fact that no
One, etc.
Tà é: a T at a v, In or by deceiving.
Tô amºčva è; a T at a v, In or by the fact that no one,
etC.
IIpos Tó punèéva Čša Tata v, In addition to the fact
that no one, etc. *
Ată to pmåéva è? at at à v, On account of the fact that
no one deceives.
Af To be Written,
1. He sold (it) to Philip to hinder the union of the
Greeks. 2. O that I had not sold (it) to Philip to hinder
the union of the Greeks! 3. If I had sold (it) to Philip
to hinder the union of the Greeks, it would be left to you
to cry aloud and to make (it) plain to these (citizens). 4.
It was not possible for the defendant to escape the Calum-
nious accusations in which the prosecutor was strong, from
the fact that he spoke first. 5. The prosecutor will be
strong in calumnious accusations from the fact of speaking
first. 6. In addition to having been a cause of the peace
(with Philip), they had even hindered the city from making
it with a public council of the Greeks. 7. They were not
ashamed to declare that we had hindered the city from
making peace, in addition to having been a cause of the
war. 8. They would immediately be practically refuted
by me, if I should appear to be eloquent in no manner
whatsoever. 9. I should have appeared eloquent, if they w.
had called the one who speaks the truth eloquent. 10.
The fact that he was not ashamed, because he fabricated
falsehoods and derided his friends, this seemed to me to
LESSON XIV. 53
be most unblushing on his part. 11. He seemed to me
to glory in the fact that he himself broke the treaty. 12.
He seemed to me to glory in fabricating falsehoods. 13.
The city proclaimed these things, to the end that no one
might break the treaty. 14. The city proclaimed these
things to the end that no one might ever search for (the
occasion) from which so great a war arose. 15. Scribendo
dicimus diligentius, dicendo scribimus facilius, 16. Scis
magnam eruditionis partem esse Scire rerum vocabula.
L E S S O N XIV.
THE INFINITIVE (continued).
IReferences.
GooD., §§ 263, 265. KüH., §§ 306, 1; 318, 8.
HAD., 765, 838, 847. CURT., §§ 561, 617, Obs., 3; 621, d.
HAD. El., 529, 572, 573. CR., §§ 663, 713, d.
KoCH, S 120, 2.
Examples.
1. Tót' éyò pudvos Tóv Tpvtdveov #vavrud.6mv juiv
p.m.8 eu to te v Tapa Tows vöuovs. Then I alone of the
Prytâmes was opposed to your doing anything contrary to
the laws.
2. KAéapxos 8é Tóre pukpov čáčbvye to u; k at a Te-
Tpo 67 va v. And Clearchus, at that time, narrowly escaped
being stoned to death.
3. Katapue? A: Seáp a cév a t Táče; Do you deny that
you have done these things 2 -
4. Oirot elaw ois 6pâte advow tº juiv ćuTočov to pº
#öm efv at évôa Tá\at a Teščopew. These (men) whom you
See are the only (men who are) longer in the way of our
being at once where we have long been hastening.
54 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
5. Ei Še yevnaðueffa Tl 8aa Nei, Tà éuTroödov (= ow8év
éutočov) an oix. Távta Tà betwóTata Tadóvtas 58puto-
puévows & To 6 a vet v. And if we shall fall into the power
of the king, what hinders that we, suffering everything
most terrible, die insulted 2 -
6. Tſs 6 coxſo as Tov ‘EX\matovtov & Axo Tp to 6 fivat
kat’ &ceivovs Tows Xpdvows ; Who (was) he that prevented
the Hellespont from falling into other hands in those times
(uſ is not usually expressed w. the infin, after coxſo)
7. Kai Tovs Tutmöetovs Tepºpe Toitov čT up exm 6%-
v a t. And he sent suitable persons to attend to these things.
8. Kipos 8e Xveuvéo et éðoke Tă ăpTaguéva &věpátroëa,
àu Tov čvrvyxávogu, & Toxa uſ?&ve v. And Cyrus gave
to Syennesis (permission) to take back the slaves which
had been carried off, if (the Cilicians) should anywhere fall
in (with them).
Vocabulary.
Oppose, évavriča), @.
Contrary to, Tapá w acc.
Law, väpos, ov, 6.
Narrowly, (a little), pukpóv.
Escape, ékºpečyo.
Stone-to-death, karaterpó0, 6. '
Deny, katapuéopat, oùpat, rare;
wsu. dpvéopat, oùpat.
Hinder, be in the way of, Čuro-
ôóv w.eival expressed or under-
stood.
Prevent, hinder, kao)\{ja).
Terrible, Ševčs, #, 6v.
Insult, treat with insolence,
tºpiča).
Longer, étu ; no longer, oùkért,
pumkéta (written either in one
word, or separated).
Hasten, a Teijóo.
Suitable persons, étruthèetot, ov,
oi.
Attend to, TripleAéopat, oùpat, &
€Tupé\opal, w, gen.
Take back, diro)\apſ3ávo.
Slave, divöpáTroöov, ov, Tó.
Seize-and-carry-off, Öpiráčo.
Fall-in-with, ēvtvyxávo.
Fall-into-other-hands, be ali-
enated, d\\otpuéopat, oùpal.
Hellespont, ‘EAAño Tovros, ov, 6.
Forget, €triXavéâvopat.
Remember, piépumpial.
Natura, i, qiāorts, eas.
Pation, êdo, 6.
Ut, w. subjunc. Greek infin.
Alius, &\\os, m, o.
Spolium, Adqvpov, ov, Tó; usu, in
plur. --
LESSON XIV. 55
Copia, ae, eitropia, as, ii; sometimes Tpós & acc.; resistendum esse,
plur, eúTopiat. &v6ío Taoréal Setu.
Augeo, atéâvo (sometimes ačo). Iraoundia, ÖpyiNórms, mros, i.
Admoneo, gravaulpujako (éri, Impedior, Šutobičokat, ". Pä &
dvá, utpuffolko). infin. ; also other constructions.
Quotidie, éká0 Tms figuépas. Plures, plura, TAetoves or TAetovs,
Meditor, évvoéco, 6. TAetova or TAeto.
Resisto, äv6tatapa w, dat. , or
Oral Exercise.
1. ‘Huiv čutro86v eta t to p. 7) toºto Tot fig at . They are
in the way of our doing this.
Oü8év juºv proööv čott To um of Touro To who at,
Nothing is in the way of our doing this.
p 6 * * a
2. T. epys, was Touro Tomaa
T. elpye. mugs Tay Toyro Tougal
T. epye. quas un Toºro Tonga i
T. epye ºuds Tov ºn Touro Tougal **
Tº eipyet juás to u; totro Totmaat ; All five expres-
sions mean, What hinders us from doing this? And
if we take tt eſpyet as equivalent to ow8év etpyet, we
have a sixth expression, Ti etpyet juás ph où Toito
Totma at ; rendered by the same words. Cf. Good,
§ 263. -
3. Eòoké uot oivov trueiv, He gave me wine to drink.
"Ečoké uot to duðpáToča à Toxap 84 vetv, He gave
me (permission) to take back the slaves.
To ſuav Tot, arpateiſuatos karéâtre d v M&T Tet v to
a TpatóTečov, He left half of the army behind to
guard the camp.
4. He is in the way of my doing this, 'Eutro86v čartſ plot
to a toûto Totfia at.
He is not in the way of my doing this, Očk épitoööv
éatt plot to uń of Totto Totha'at.
5. "EcºAvgé pe Toiro Totºgal, He prevented me from
doing this.
56 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
To be Written.
1. We have long been opposed to doing anything con-
trary to the laws. 2. Those who were opposed to doing
anything contrary to the laws narrowly escaped being
stoned to death. 3. If they had denied that they had
done anything contrary to the laws, they would have nar-
rowly escaped being stoned to death. 4. What would
hinder that we, Suffering everything most terrible, should
die insulted, if we should deny that we had done these
things 2 5. Let us conquer these men whom we see, that
they may no longer hinder our being where we have long
been hastening. 6. If they are in the way of our being
where we have long been hastening, they will die insulted.
7. Who was he that prevented our dying insulted in those
times 7 8. If they had not sent suitable persons to attend
to these things, what would have hindered their dying
insulted ? 9. O that they would send suitable persons
to attend to these things, in Order that he might not sell
(it) to Philip to hinder the city from making peace! 10.
They would have given to Cyrus (permission) to take back
the slaves that had been seized and carried off, if he had
anywhere fallen in (with them). 11. In addition to hav-
ing been a cause of the peace, they prevented the Helles-
pont from falling into other hands in those times. 12. If
you have received favors, do not forget (them) through all
time; but if you have done (a favor), do not remember (it).
13. Illud natura non patitur, ut aliorum spoliis nostras
copias augeamus, 14. Admoneo ut quotidie meditëre
resistendum esse iracundiae. 15. Impedior ne plura
dicam. - - .
LESSQN XV. 57
L E S S O N X W.
THE INFINITIVE (continued).
References.
GooD., §§ 266, 267, 268, 274. KüH., §§ 337, 9; 341, R. 3.
HAD., 769, 770, 772, 813. CURT., §§ 564, 565, 601.
HAD. El., 531, 532. CR., § 671.
KOCH, §§ 113, 118, 5; 122, 1, 2.
Examples.
1. Kai kpavyńu Tox\}v čTotovu kaxoëvres àAXixovs,
& a Te :}; :}; oi êyyúTata
Tów Toxepiſov kai épwyov čk Töv oknvogatov. And they
made much noise in calling one another, so that even the
enemy heard; wherefore those of the enemy (who were)
nearest even fled from their tents.
2. 'ſ 26kpares, viv učv’Avörgy of Teto dueba, dAN'
dºteuév ae, éti Toito uévrol, ép’ ºre unkét év Taúty
TÉ &ntrast 8, a Tp (8 evu. O Socrates, now we will not
yield to Anytus, but we let you go, on this condition how-
ever, that you no longer continue in this pursuit.
3. ‘O Sé efºrev Štº a treforagóat 8očxotto è b” () uſire
airos toºs "EXXmvas 38 vice ºvi uſt éceivovs k a tet v Tas
olkias. And he said that he was willing to make a treaty,
on condition that neither he himself injure the Greeks, nor
they burn the houses.
4. IIoxxoi &v6poirot droðvágicovot Tp 6 tep ov Tpi v
8}\ot ytyve a 6 at oiot gav. Many men die before they
become manifest what they were. ^
5. II pivf yap 8) k at axia at to atpárevua Tpos
ãptortov 8aat) sys épávn. For before the army halted for
breakfast, the king appeared.
6. Katrol 3xm6és ye, 6s Tos eitreºv, où8év eipſicaauw.
V N. / 3. A c/
Kai Tovs 7ToMeputovs a ko we t w &ote
3 #
58 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Although, to speak frankly, they have uttered nothing that
is really true.
\ ^ 3. *
7. ITétretagal éyò ék & v etva pumöéva déuketu äv6pdº-
Tov. I am persuaded that I have voluntarily wronged no
One among men.
* ^ D CA / 2 / e / *\ /
8. To tas ióias evepyeglas intopupivºjaketu kat Aéyetv
a t < p of 8 e?v Šuotöv čott T3 Övetàigetv. To suggest one's
own benefactions and to speak (of them) is almost like
casting reproach.
3/ 2 / 3 tº \ 3M 3/ ^ 3/ 2 v
9. "Avev doxdvtov oščev &v oite ca)\ov oire dyadov
N 5 * *A * \
yévotto, ös uév a v v ex8 vºt t e i Te ºv, où8apov, Šu 8é 8)
Toſs troAepulco's Tavrátraoruv. Without commanders, noth-
ing either honorable or good could be accomplished any-
where, to speak in a summary manner; but above all in
military affairs.
* Observe that &are may take either the infin. or the indic. With the
latter, it is often rendered wherefore.
t 'A6tketv is used here as a proper pres, to continue to injure ; not perf.,
as often elsewhere. Cf. Ex. 7. -
# IIpív is often followed by a finite mood, but is then usually rendered
wntºl.
Vocabulary.
Noise, especially of shouting or
calling, kpavyń, ſis, j.
So that, &orte.
Hear, droño.
Terrify, ŠkirAſtro.
Let go, dºpinput.
On this condition, that, ºr,
roërg, q &re.
However, puévrot.
Contrary to, trapá w. acc.
On condition that, eq’ 3, or ép'
ºre.
Make a treaty, ortrévôopat.
Yield to, obey, retéopal, w, dat.
Anytus, "Avvros, ov, 6. -
Before, sooner than, Tpó0.6ev
Tpiv, Tpórepov Tpiv, or Tpiv alone.
Manifest, 87Wos, m, ov.
What, of what sort, oios, a, ov.
Voluntary, willing, Šköv eival.
True, d\móñs, és.
To be accomplished, take
place, yiyvopal.
Commander, àpxov, ovros, 6.
Suggest, intopup who ko.
Own, personal, tºos, ta, wov.
Benefaction, eiepyegia, as, i.
Almost, ÖAiyov Šeiv.
Cast reproach, ēvetëtſao.
Collis, yń\opos, ov, 6.
LESSON XV. 59
Celeriter, taxéos. Øre plmöets. The plur. in Greek,
Priusquam, Tpórepov Tpiv, w, inſin. plmöéves, is rare.
Adversarius, évavrios, ov, 6. Afficior exsilio, pvyās ék ris
A or ab, w. ablat., ÜTó w. gen. ; Tarpiðos yiyvopat.
ab...sentiatur is best ea pressed Ita...ut, oùro(s)...&orre.
by aio 660-6au, w. Subj, acc. Vivo, Çüo, ö, aor. comm. §8tov,
Communio, Teixt{o. pf. Begioka.
Pax, eipſium, ms, i. Carus, biXos, m, ov, pt.Nairepos, pt-
His conditionibus, ne qui, eq’ Naitaros, w, dat.
Oral Exercise,
1. To T' ékelvø éival, So far as depends on this man.
2. To cata toûrov eival, So far as relates to this man.
3. To viv eival, For the present.
4. To T' ékelvous eival drox6\ette àv, So far as depended
On them, you would have perished.
5. (‘ſ’s) éuoi čokeiv, As seems to me.
6. (ſ2s) ouroai dicotiaat, or ākoúa at oitoat, So to hear, or
if one hear thus.
7. (ſ2s) etcáoat, As one may conjecture, or if one com-
pare; 6s unkpov ueyáAq, etcáoat, to compare small
with great.
8. (2s eitreſu, or Ös étros eitreºv is variously rendered; one
7might almost Say, to speak generally, to speak frankly,
to use this (somewhat strong) eaſpression ; and some-
times, yet rarely, by the common English phrase, so
to speak. Plato makes it antithetical to dºpt&e?
Xóyo, with accurate statement.
9. ‘ſ’s avveX6vitt eitreºu, To speak summarily.
‘ſ’s a vuTöuos eitreºv, To speak concisely.
‘ſ’s d"TXós eitreºu, To speak simply, or ingenuously.
To 6\ov eitreºv, to Éatraveliteſu, To speak the whole
(truth), on the whole.
10. "Oorov yé d' eiðéval, As far, at least, as I know.
11. ‘OXiyov beiv, or öAſyov without 8eiv, To want little,
i. e. almost.
60 EXERCISES IN GREEK syNTAX.
12. Ekov etval, To be willing, voluntary, voluntarily.
13. To Tijuepov eival, To-day.
To be Written."
1. Those of the enemy who were nearest called one
another, making much noise, so that our soldiers, hearing
(it), were terrified. 2. They will let us go, On this condi-
tion, however, that we no longer do anything contrary to
the laws of the city. 3. We will let you go, on condition
that you neither injure the Greeks nor do anything con-
trary to the laws. 4. We will make a treaty, on condition
that you neither yield to Anytus nor let this man go.
5. This man died before he became manifest what he was.
6. They let these men go before it became manifest what
they were. 7. They will die before it becomes manifest
what they are. 8. They became manifest what they were
before we let them go. 9. They are persuaded that they
have voluntarily wronged no one among men. 10. He is
persuaded, to speak frankly, that he has uttered nothing
which is really true. 11. We are persuaded, to speak in
a summary manner, that nothing either honorable or good
will be accomplished without commanders. 12. If you
were to suggest (imperf) your own benefactions, it would
be almost like casting reproach. 13. Collem celeriter,
priusquam ab adversariis sentiatur, commiinit. 14. Fecit
pacem his conditionibus, ne qui afficirentur exsilio. 15.
Ita vixit ut Atheniensibus esset carissimus.
LESSON XVI. . 61
I, E S S O N X W I.
THE PARTICIPLE.
References,
GooD., §§ 275, 276. KüH., § 309, 3, (a), (c), (d).
HAD., 785, 787. CURT., §§ 578, 579.
HAD, El., 538, 539. CR., § 674.
KOCH, S $ 123, 124.
Examples.
1. Kairo, yoy 6pó Tàs Tów Weyd v Tov 8vváueos
To is 3 cot out as to TAeſatov cupſovs. And indeeed I,
at least, see that those who hear (are) for the most part
masters of the power of those who speak.
2. 'AXX' owk attv, oùk éattv Štros juápters, āvêpes
'A6mvalov, Tov Útěp Tàs d"Távtov čNev6epias cat gotmpias
kivövvov &p & u e vot, uá to vs Mapadout 7 poke vöv-
veð a a ut as Tów Tpoyóvov can Tows v IIAatalais Tapa-
T a § a uévo vs cat Tows év XaXauºut v a v A axia a ut as
kai Tovs T' "Apreputatº kai Toxxovs érépous to us év toſs
8muoglots uvijuaat ke up vows dyadows &vöpas, ois &rav-
tas Guoſos fi TôAs Tās avtås à ét 6 a. a a a tuñs 6ayev,
Ataxium, oùxī Tows k a top 66 a avt as attöv oë8é Tows
kp a T ja a v Tas advows. But it is not possible, it is not
possible that you erred, men of Athens, in taking on your-
selves the danger in behalf of the liberty and safety of all;
no by those of your ancestors who were foremost in the
danger at Marathon, and by those who drew up their lines
in battle array at Plataea, and by those who fought in the
naval engagement at Salamis, and by those at Artemisium,
and many others, those who rest in our public cemeteries,
brave men, all of whom without distinction the city, deem-
ing (them all) worthy of the same honor, has buried, Æschi-
62
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
nes, – not alone those of them who were successful, not
those alone who were victorious.
/ \ * *
3. Où 805xoplat 8voxepès eitely ow8èv ćpy 6 u e vos toū
X6'yov.
beginning of my speech.
I do not wish to say anything unpleasant in the
a f 5 / 5 M N * º
4. Kipos of Taos étéAeëtmorev, dump & v IIepo 60y T & v
N a N 3. * /
peta Küpov Tov apxatov ye v opévo v 8aa lºtkótatos té
v sy 2 /
ical apxeuv d'Étotatos.
Cyrus thus died, being a man, of
the Persians who have lived since the ancient Cyrus, both
most royal and most worthy to rule.
Vocabulary.
For the most part, rô TAetortov,
Master, köptos, ov, 6; master of
(adj.), kūptos, ia, wov.
Fight-in-a-naval-engagement,
vaupaxéo, 6.
Salamis, XaXapts, ivos, j.
Err, épaptăva).
Take up, aipo; take on one's
self, alpopau.
To be foremost in the danger,
Tpokwóvveto.
In behalf of, itép, w, gen.
Liberty, Nev6epia, as, i.
Safety, deliverance, oratmpia,
as, i.
To be successful, katop660, 6.
To be victorious, to have
power, Kparéo.
Alone, plávos, m, ov.
Deem worthy of détéo, ö, w.
gen.
Honor, rupiń, fis, i.
To rest, to lie, keipial.
Public, belonging to the peo-
ple, &mpéortos, a, ov.
Cemetery, plumpa, aros, ré: strict-
ly, a monument, especially in
memory of the dead; then, a
place of monuments, a cem-
etery. -
Brave, dyaffés, fi, 6v, in a military
S627? S62.
Without distinction, in like
mariner, Öpioios.
Bury, 64TTa).
It is possible, éortiv (note the ac-
cent).
It is not possible that, oùk éortly
ôtros, w. indic.
No! by, pad w acc.
Ancestor, Tpóyovos, ov, 6.
Marathon, Mapabóv, Övos, j. At
Marathon, Mapaéðvi (notice
here the dat. of place).
To say, to speak, eitely (only in
aor, pres. ‘bmpt).
Unpleasant, 8vo, Yepſis, és.
Beginning, in the beginning of,
dpxópevos, m, ov, w, gen. -
Speech, Aëyos, ov, 6.
LESSON XVI.
63
*
Royal, 8a0 iMukös, Ö, 6v.
Rule, àpxø.
Terra, Xópa, as, i.
Muto, äre, d\\átra), d\\ášo, #A\a-
§a, #AAaxa, #AAayuat, A\dx6mu,
oftener A\áymv.
Mos, moris, #60s, ovs, Tó; often
plur. = mores.
Aliud...aliud, &\\o pºev...á\\o 6é;
oftener Tô Hév...tó 8é, or rā pºev
...tà èé.
Ago, Śre, Tpátro.
Simulo, äre, trpoo Trotéopat, oùpat.
Perfidus, a, um, àtriotos, ov.
Alexander, 'AAéčavôpos, ov, 6.
Morior, diroðvía ko.
Anulus, ŠaktüAtos, ov, 6.
Perdiccas, IIepôikkas, ov, 6.
Oral Exercise.
1. Oi Aéyovtes, Those who speak.
Oi Aéautes, Those who spoke.
Oi Aéovres, Those who will speak.
Ta Aeyóueva, The things which are said.
Ta AeAeyaéva, The things which have been said.
Ta Aex86 vta, The things which were said.
Tô Nexøma dueva, The things which will be said.
3.
To Sokoúvta, The things which seem proper.
/Ta 86%avra, The things which seemed proper, or which
were resolved upon.
The resolutions.
Tà èeóoyuéva, The things which have seemed proper,
or which have been resolved upon.
‘Eyð to Tpayuá eiuſ toūto 6e 6p a kºs, I have done
The resolutions.
this deed (lit. am having dome).
‘O Tapa Sãs Šícmy Éatav Še Šok 6s, The one who has
transgressed will have given Satisfaction. -
‘Hzev âyyeXos Aéyov 6tt Ae Not Tros elm >vévveals Tà
ãºpa, A messenger came saying that Syennesis had
left the heights (lit. was having left).
Totto ºtápxetv juás e i 867 as jyotpat, I think that
you are acquainted with this.
Tvy v 6 a kov trov.aitos éavrov čatat, He himself will
doubtless know himself (lit. will be knowing).
* Ho av & T to To 5 v Tes pixiiriro, They were distrusting
Philip.
Eä To tº v Toxxoiſs éa Tuv, He is doing good to many.
64 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
To be Written.
1. Those who hear are for the most part masters of the
power of those who speak. 2. He who hears, one might
almost say,” is master of the power of him who speaks.
3. Those who fought in the naval engagement at Salamis
did not err in taking on themselves the danger in behalf
of the liberty and safety of all. 4. Not those who are
successful, nor those who are victorious alone, are deemed
worthy of honor. 5. Those who rest in the public ceme-
teries, brave men, all without distinction having been
deemed worthy of the same honor, were buried by the city.
6. It is not possible, it is not possible, men of Athens,
that we erred, those of us who took on ourselves the danger
in behalf of the liberty and safety of all. 7. In taking
upon ourselves the danger in behalf of the liberty and
safety of all, we shall not err. 8. It is not possible that
those who rest in the public cemeteries erred in taking
on themselves the danger in behalf of the liberty and
safety of all. 9. It is not possible that we err, no by
those of our ancestors who were foremost in the danger
at Marathon. 10. Let us not say anything unpleasant
in the beginning of our speeches. 11. Do not say any-
thing unpleasant in the beginning of your speech. 12.
Thus those of your ancestors who were foremost in the
danger at Marathon died, being men most royal and most
Worthy to rule. 13. Terra mutata non mutat mores.
14. Omnes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes, perfidi sunt.
15. Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae,
* Cf. Ln. XV. Oral, 8.
LESSON XVII. 65
LESS O N XVII.
THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
References.
GooD., § 277. KüH., § 312, 4.
HAD., 788, 789. CURT., §§ 580 – 583.
HAD. El., 539, 540. . CR., §§ 579–583.
KoCH, $ 124, 1.
Examples.
1. Xi, & 6 o'euvos dump kai 84 a TT 6ov toºs &XXovs
okóTet Tpos Taütmu Toia Twi céxpmaat Túxm, 8' àu Tais
prev & v usta Toxxâs évêetas Tpdºms, Šua Tó Tatpi Tpos
Tô 8v8aa kaxeio Tp oa e 6pe 6 ov, To ué\av Tp #8 ov cat
Tà 340pa a Toyy go v Kai To Trauðayo'yetov kop 6 v., oiké-
Tov táštv, oùk éAev6épov Tatēos éxo v, dump 8é yew gue-
vos Tà puntpi Texo iſ a n Tös 88Aovs dueytyvoakes kai
TâAXa ovveakevopot, Tiju peu vökta w e8p tºo v cat kp at m-
p tºo v kai. k a 6 a pov To us Texo vſ. šuo vs cat dTo-
pºd T to v Tó Tnxó kai Toſs Tuttpots kai du va T as dºro
toū ka9appoi, k exe ôov Aéyetv “ébuyou caków, eipov čuet-
vov.”.... But you, the venerable man, and (the one) de-
spising the rest (of men), consider in comparison with this
what sort of fortune you have experienced, by which, when
a boy, you were brought up in great indigence, sitting to-
gether with your father in attendance on the school, rubbing
the ink, and sponging the benches, and sweeping the school-
room, having a domestic's position, not a free boy's, and
having become a man, you read the books to your mother
while engaged in the rites of initiation and with (her) per.
pared the other things; during the night, robing in fawn-
skins those who were (being) initiated, and mixing (for
them) bowls (of wine) and cleansing them and wiping them
off with clay and bran and raising (them) up from the puri-
E.
66 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
fication bidding (them) say, “I have escaped evil, have
found (something) better.”....
2. ‘Tuets 8e jºb op 6 u e vot T & Te Tp a yu áva kai
8va xep at vovtes #yete Tiju eipſiumv Šuos. But you,
though viewing with suspicion what had been done, and
though in ill-humor, nevertheless kept the peace.
3. Oik Ša Tuv d'êt ko Övt a Śivapuv 8eflatau crijaao 6at.
It is not possible that (any one) by acting unjustly acquire
firm power.
4. Tov d'êt ko Övta Tapa Tovs 8tcaatös àyetv Šei Šikmu
86 aſ owta. It is necessary to bring the one who acts
unjustly before the judges that he may suffer punishment
(lit. give justice). *
‘O pum Sapels áv6potos of Tatēeūetat. The man
who has not been whipped (i.e. if he has not been whipped)
is not (being) educated.
6. ’Avip Šikatos ojk 6 am dºucóv, dAA &tis d8tketv
8v v duevos of 80%Netat. A just man (is) not the one
who is not unjust, but one who, being able (i. e. if he is
able) to act unjustly, does not wish (it).
Vocabulary.
Bring up, rpéqiao. (Something) better, àueuvov;
In, in the midst of perá w. gen, neut. of duelvau.
Indigence, Évêeta, as, i. Read, dvaytyvögkø.
Domestic (as subst.), oikérms, ov, 6. Book, 8i/3\os, ov, i.
Position, rank, rāśts, eos, ). Mother, piñrmp, tpás, j.
Free, éAeë6epos, a, ov. To be engaged in the rites of
Raise up, dvio Tmut; intrans, tenses, initiation, TeXéao, 6.
to rise up. Prepare with, ovokevopéopat, où-
To be initiated, TeXéopat, oùpat. pal (orču, o kevopéopat; fr. o.kevo-
Purification, kaðappās, où, 6. pós, òv, caring for the bag-
Bid, order, kexei'a). gage; fr. o.keim, tá, baggage,
Escape, pet yao, w, acc. épa, #, care).
Evil, kaków, où, Tó. Robe in favn-skins, veðptćo
Find, eúptako. (vegpós, où, 6, a fawn).
LESSON XVII.
67
Mix a bowl (of wine), kpatmpt-
ſo (kpatip, mpos, 6, a mixing
bowl).
View with suspicion, Öqopáo-
pal, Öpiat (itré, épáopal).
To be in ill-humor, 8vo, Yepaiva,
(8vo)(epſis, és, hard to take in
hand; 80s, hard, Xeip, hand).
Nevertheless, àpos. Not to be
confounded with Öpotos, in like
manner, without distinction.
Keep, dyo.
Peace, eipſium, ms, j.
Permanent, 3é8atos, ata, atov.
Power, 60yapus, eas, j.
Act unjustly, to be unjust, döt-
kéco, ö ; to be ääukos.
Greek, "ENAmv, os, 6.
Whip, 6épo.
Educate, travčeňo.
Bring, lead, &yo.
Before, into the presence of,
Tapd w. acc.
Judge, or juror, Šukaoths, où, 6.
Dum velim, particip. of Boðopal.
Minuo, äre, pºetów, 6 (petov, less.)
Augeo, ačāva).
Risus, us, m., yéAos, otos, 6.
Interdum, śvtote, or ëorð’ Śre.
Ita...ut, oùros...&gre.
Repente, ééaiqiums.
Erumpo, spoken of laughter, ytyvo-
plat.
Teneo, karéxo.
Nequeo, ire, où 6üvaptat.
Mitto, Trépºra),
Legatus, Tpeogevtſis, où, 6; plur.
Tpéorgets.
Oro, äre, airéa), 6, 20, acc.; 6éopal
(dep. pass.), w, ger.
Auxilium, often in plur., ÖqiáAeta,
e
ClS, 7).
. Mendax, acis, \revööpevos, m, ov.
Ne quidem, oëöé.
Verum, i, to d\móés.
Credo, Truo Teijo, w, dal.
Soleo, eloffa.
Homo, ävěpotros, ov, 6.
Oral Exercise.
1. Mā kāums b{\ou ävöpa e depy et & v, Be not weary
in conferring benefits on a friend.
Ma v 6d. m cduve. Do not gr v in learning
gºt avov un, cauve, Do not grow weary € 5°
(. * * /
2. "Otav duaprávns Tu, xaſp fitt 6 u e vos, When you
err in anything, rejoice if you are defeated.
an > •) * 6. \ * *
3. TIás dump, kāv 800Aos Tws, #8état to pós 6p 6 v,
Every man, even if he be a slave, is pleased at beholding
the light.
4. Taota Štrpatte &ovXeijov, May be variously rendered
according to the connection, he did these things while a
member of the council, or, though he was a member of the
68 EXERCISES IN GREEK: SYNTAX.
council, or, because he was a member, etc., or, by virtue of his
office as a member, etc.: Taüta äv Štrpatte 8 ovX et a v, he
would do these things, if he were a member of the council, or,
while a member, etc., or, though he was a member, etc., or, be-
cause he was, etc., Or, by virtue of his office as a member, etc.
5, 'Apxópevos, in beginning, at first, Texevtów, at last,
finally; 6taxwtov Xpóvov, after an interval of time; 8ta\t-
Tov Toxiv xpóvov, 8tax- utºpov xpóvov, after a long inter-
val, after a short interval. In a similar way, Two you
Toxiv, OT atºpov xpóvov, having 'waited, etc.: ei Totów,
with right (lit. doing well). The participles àyov, Šxov,
Xaflów, ſhepov, xpdjuevos, are often rendered by the Eng-
lish preposition with.
To be Written.
1. When boys, they were brought up in great indigence;
and having become men, they had a domestic's position,
not a free man's. 2. Raising those who were being initi-
ated up from the purification they bade (them) say, We
have escaped evil, have found (something) better, 3. Those
who were being initiated rising up from the purification
said, We have escaped evil, have found (something) better.
4. Reading the books to your mother while engaged in the
rites of initiation and with (her) preparing the other things,
you robed in fawn-skins those who were being initiated,
and mixed (for them) bowls (of wine). 5. The city, though
viewing with suspicion what had been done, and though
in ill-humor, nevertheless kept the peace. 6. The city,
though viewing with suspicion all things without distinc-
tion that had been done, nevertheless kept the peace. 7.
We shall not acquire permanent power by acting unjustly.
8. No one among men (lit. no one of men) ever acquired
permanent power by acting unjustly. 9. A Greek said
long ago that the man who had not been whipped was not
educated. 10. We will bring before the judges those who
LESSON XVIII. 69
act unjustly, that they may suffer punishment. 11. Just
men (are) not those who are not unjust, but those who,
being able to act unjustly, do not wish (it). 12. Many
men, if they are able to acquire power by unjust means
(by acting unjustly) do not wish (it). 13. Vereor me dum
minuere velim laborem augeam. 14. Risus interdum ita
repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenére nequeamus. 15.
Misit legatos Oraturos auxilia. 16. Mendaci homini ne
verum quidem dicenti credere non solemus.
I, E S S O N X W III.
THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
References.
GooD., § 277, Notes 1 & 2. KüH., §§ 312, R. 6; R. 8; 312,
HAD., 795. * 6, & R. 13.
HAD. El., 540. - CURT., § 587.
KOCH, $ 124, 3, 4, CR., §§ 587, 588.
Examples.
1. ‘AXXà un of roºt’ XaXetróv, 6 &vêpes, 6duatov
éxpvyetv, dx\a Toxi, XaXeTötepov Tovmpiavº 66ttov Yap
6avdºrov 6eſ, kai viv dyo ſuev ćte 8paôus à v kal Tpeo/34–
Tms into Tot, £paëvrépov édxov, of 8 €uot catfiyopot àre
8ervoi ca. 36eſs & vºtes into Too 64ttovos, Tās caktas. But
(I apprehend) that this thing may not be difficult, -
(namely) to escape death, – but it is far more difficult (to
escape) baseness; for it runs faster than death. And now
I, because I am slow and old, have been overtaken by the
slower (of the two); but my accusers, because they are
powerful and quick, (have been overtaken) by the swifter,
(namely) by wickedness. / gº
2. To Toº 6eoſ, a muetov čváAAots Adyots Tox^axoſ. He
70 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
étréaxe X 6) ov't a u et a # 6. The monition of the god, in
other discourses, checked me in many places in the midst
of my speech (lit. in the midst of speaking).
3. 'AtroTAe: oikače, k at Tep peo’ov xeluſovos év Tos.
He sails away homeward, although it is midwinter.
4. Eudyovro àu a Tooev due vot of "EXAmves. The
Al Ab pevo a m
Greeks fought at the same time that they were marching.
A 3.
5. "A u a fix to d v at éA Novt t cripukas repºre Tepi
orrow8óv. At sunrise (lit. together with Sun rising) he sent
heralds concerning a treaty.
2 N * s/ / 3/ N
6. E. 56 s Traºes à v Tes pav6ávovatu äpyetv Te cat
āpxed 6al. In their very boyhood (lit. immediately being
boys) they learn both to govern and to be governed.
º * * N *
7. Oiśe uév yao ow8és Tov 6dvarov oijó el Tvyyāvel Tó
3. / * y p A \ 2 ºx 3. .*
div6pºro Tavrov påytotou ov Tóv dyadów, Öečiaat 6' 6 s
ei ei 86 Tes, &rt ué yuatov Tóv calcóu èattu. For no one
knows death, not even if it chance to be to the human
being (among the) greatest of all blessings; but (men) fear
it, as if well knowing that it is (among the) greatest of
evils.
* 5 *
8. X'vXXap/8divet Kūpov & S d To k Te vöv.
He appre-
hends Cyrus as if to put him to death (or apparently to put
him to death).
Vocabulary.
Because, Šte, before a particip.
emphasizes the causal meaning.
Slow, 3paô0s, eia, Ö.
Old, Tpeogórms, ov, 6; subst, or
adj.
To be taken, or overtaken,
ãNiokopiat.
Powerful, Setvös, Ö, 6v.
Quick, sharp, Čás, eia, Ö.
Swift, taxis, eia, w.
Monition, sign, a muetov, ov, Tó.
In many places, troX\axoo.
Check, restrain, Čiréxo.
In the midst of petašč.
Although, kaitep, before a par-
ticip. emphasizes the concessive
neaning.
Midwinter, puéoros Xelpidov, Övos, 6.
At the same time, àpia, before a
particip. emphasizes the tempo-
ral meaning.
Herald, knpwé, vkos, 6.
Send, Téutra).
Sail away, dirot)\éo.
LFSSON XVIII.
71
At sunrise, ópa \iq àvaréA\ovt.
In one's very boyhood, eúðūs
Tais &v, lit. immediately be-
ing a boy.
Fear, Šáðouka, 6éôoukas, 6éôouke, or
2d & 3d persons, Šáðuas, Šáðue;
plur. Šáðupwev, Öeóoikate or öéötte,
ôeóiaort(v).
Death, 6&vatos, ov, Ö.
As if, Ös.
Well, e3.
Not even, oióē.
It chances to be, Tvyxável Šv.
Live, Čáo), @., ºffo'o, aor. & pf.
comm. Bigov, 8egioka.
Great, in the sense of much,
ToMüs.
Sit in attendance on, Tpoore-
ôpečo Tpós, w, dat.
School, school-room, school-
house, Štěaoka)\etov, ov, Tó.
Apprehend, seize, a v\\apſ3ávo;
apprehend, fear, Šáðouka.
Act unjustly, döukéco, 6; the pres.
often as perf.
Put to death, dirokretva).
Wipe off, dropdºrra).
Clay, Tm) Ös, où, 6.
Bran, Titupov, ov, Tó.
Me juvat, jöopat; const, often w.
particip.
Pervenio, äqukvéopat, oùplat.
Ad finem, eis or étri Tô Té\os.
Bellum, TróNepos, ov, 6.
Punicus, a, um, pović, 6 or à.
Velut, Ös ; velut...fuerim, Ös...
yevópevos.
In parte, év påpel, w, gen.
Labor, Tóvos, ov, Ö.
Danger, kivövvos, ov, 6.
Vitium, TAmupé\eta, as, j.
IMens, vöos, vows, voi), 6.
Quantumvis, kaitrep.
Exiguus, a, um, pukpós, d, év.
In majus, eis Teptorađtepa.
Excédo, Škóatva).
Oral Exercise.
1 t ”E e/ 3 v 2\ / > V an P
. ‘O "Epos, & Te autos à v udvapyos, éti Tào av TóApav
āšet.
Eros, because he alone (lit. he himself) is monarch,
will lead to every daring attempt.
"A Te 8paôys & v, Because one is slow.
"A Te Selvoi čv tes, Because they are powerful.
2. Me T a § y do 6 e v 6 v, In the midst of sickness.
A. éºol, A. et a § 5, In the midst of speaking.
3. Kai Tep of to oropos & v, 8eXTiov &v yevoto, Though
thou art. So wise, thou couldst become better.
Ka Tep oitos dyados & v, a odºrepos àu yevoto, Though
thou art so good, thou couldst become wiser.
4. 'Etatſávišov ću a TAéovres, They sang paeans, at the
Same time that they were sailing (inter navigandum).
72 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
"Au a Taüt’ eit ov diveatm, As soon as he had said these
things, he rose up.
5. E 50 %s as 8 & v #07tdgeto, As soon as he saw me, he
saluted (me).
Toſs kaxoſs e 50 ys i86 vºtes eivot yºyvöue6a, We be-
come favorable to the honorable, as soon as we have seen
(them).
6. Xokpótmu Toffodauv Ós 6¢extuſératov Švt a Tpos
dpetàs étrºpéMetav, They regret Socrates, because as they
think he was most useful for the cultivation of virtue.
To be Written.
1. And now they themselves, because they are slow and
old, have been overtaken by the slower; while we, because
we are ‘powerful and quick, (have been overtaken) by the
Swifter. 2. The monition of the god in many places
checked him in the midst of his speech, although he was
eloquent. 3. They marched homeward, although it was
midwinter, at the same time fighting. 4. The heralds
who were sent (particip) concerning a treaty will sail away
homeward at sunrise, although it is midwinter. 5. In his
very boyhood, he used to read to his mother, while she
was engaged in the rites of initiation, the (Sacred) books,
and used to robe in fawn-skins those who were being in-
itiated. 6. They feared death as if well knowing that it
was among the greatest of evils; although no man knows
death, not even if it chance to be, to the human being,
among the greatest of blessings. 7. In his very boyhood
he lived in great indigence, sitting together with his father
in attendance on the school. 8. In their very boyhood,
the monition of the god in many places checked them in
the midst of their speech. 9. They apprehended those
acting unjustly as if to bring them before the judges. 10.
It is not possible that you erred in apprehending those
who acted unjustly as if to bring them before the judges.
LESSON XIX. 73
11. They apprehended him, on the ground that he was
acting unjustly, that they might put him to death, 12.
They apprehended him, as if to put him to death, because
he was acting unjustly, 13. They raised up from the
purification those who were being initiated, at the same
time wiping them off with clay and bran, and bidding them
say, “we have escaped evil, we have found (something)
better.” 14, Me juvat, velut inse in parte laboris ac peri-
culi fuorim, ad finem belli Punici pervenisse. (Liv) 15.
Vitia mentis, quantumvis exigua sint, in majus excedunt.
L E S S O N XIX.
THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
T&eferences.
GooD., § 278. KüH., § 312, 3, 5, 6.
HAD., 790, 792, 793. CURT., §§ 584, 586.
HAD. El., 541, 542, 544. CR., § 675.
KOCH, $ 124, 2, 4, 5.
Examples.
1. Kai usta Taüta a va T d v To vois àu Tuexes kaicós
éue Toweiv, kai ypadds, eúðūvas, eiaayyexias, Tāvta Taüt'
ét a y ávt ov got, où 8' avTöv Tó ye Tpótov, d\\a 6t
º / 5 e / - 5 / 2 Af en
ôv uáAug 6 intrexambavov dyvonged 6aw .... ev Towtous Tàot
/ & *\ \ A / N 5 e a * \
pad Xuata uéu 8va Tovs 6eoûs, 8eūrepov 6é Öt juás kai Tows
&\\ovs 'A6mvalovs éaoğumu. And after these things, when
(those) to whom it was an object to treat me ill banded
together, and brought against me indictments, accounts, im-
peachments, all these things, not at first in person, but (by
those) through whom they supposed that they would espe-
cially pass unnoticed, .... in all these things, chiefly through
the gods, but in the second place through you and the rest
of the Athenians, I came off in safety.
4
74 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
2. 'Aftó 8é üuás, 6 &vêpes 'A6mvatoi, kal 6éopat Tobro
pepluma 6at Tap' 6\ov Tov dyóva, 6tt pun cat myop j-
a a v Tos A to x vov uměev čo Tàs ypaſh;is ow8 àv éyò
Nóyov où8éva èTotočumu étépov, Táoats 6 airéals kat
AEXao (bmutats àua to ſtov kexpm a vov dvdykm cduoi
Tpos écao Ta Tów cat myopmuévov Aukpa dTokpivac 6at.
And I ask of you, men of Athens, and entreat that you
remember this in connection with the whole contest, that
if AEschines had not made any accusation beyond the in-
dictment, neither would I make in my defence a single
other argument; but since this man has, at the same time,
used all (manner of) accusations and slanders, it is unavoida-
ble for me also to reply briefly to each of the allegations.
3. 2 o 0 6' d'hôvov car' éketvovs Tows Xpdvows év Tats
éckxma tals k a 6m u ęvo v ćyó Taptov ćNeyov. But though
you (or while you) sat voiceless during those times in the
assemblies, I came forward and spoke. -
4. 'AAA'a ka (Tep d6Xíos cat calcós Tów a Tp at my & v
Tô v iſ a et épop To Neu o iſ v Tov airó ðuos int' attoo
Tot Toxéuov kai Tôv Xpatów uvpia èTaoxe Kaká, But
although your generals carried on the war with him in a
wretched and cowardly manner, yet by the war itself and
the privateers he suffered numberless evils. •
5. "E.Tetta Aéyets à èe Tpogeſwat Tó 6muorukó, & a Tep
... Aóyº To vs 6m u o Tuko iſs, dAN' oil toſs Tpaygaat kai
Toſs Toxtreiſuaat y tºy vo a cop Évo vs. Then you tell
what ought to belong to the public man, just as if public
men were known by word, but not by their deeds and po-
litical acts. #
6. TaüTa yp div, a v Tos éu o 0 Tóte kai to Tº TróAet
ovudhépov, où To Pixtºrto ºn to 9 v1 os, 8pax) bpovtſ-
a'avtes of xpmoto Tpéo Bels of Tot kaffuto èv Makečovla
Tpe's 6\ovs unvas, écos \6e pixwºrtos ék 6/pdcms Távra
Katao Tperduevos takeſ, ééov juépôv 8éka, páx\ov 8é
Tptóu ) Tettapov, eis Tov EAAſia Tovtov dºpºx0at kai Tà
LESSON XIX.
75
/ *
Xopua. O’Cº.) O'Q. Le
And though I had proposed these things at
that time, and was seeking that which was profitable to the
city, not to Philip, these useful commissioners with little
reflection sat down in Macedonia three entire months, until
Philip came from Thrace after overthrowing all the places
there, though it was possible, in ten days, may rather, in
three or four, to arrive at the Hellespont and to save the
to Wns.
Vocabulary.
It is an object (or a care) to
any one, étrupleMés éoti Tuvu.
Treat ill, kakós Troteiv.
Band together (lit. stand to-
gether), the intrans. tenses of
ovvio Tnut.
Bring against, €trāya), w, acc. &
dat.
Indictment, ypaqºm, fis, j.
Come off in safety, to be saved,
oróſopiat.
Chiefly, pud Morra.
Through, by means of, Štú, w.acc.
Make an accusation, karmyo-
péo, ø.
Beyond, outside of £o, u. ffen.
Make for one's self, make in
one's defence, Trotéopat, oùpat.
Argument, A6).os, ov, 6.
Impeachment, eio'ayyekta, as, i.
Use, Xpáopal, Öpiat.
Slander, 8Aao'qhmuia, as #.
Suppose, ÚtroNapſ3ávo.
Pass unnoticed, dyvoéopat, oùpat.
Something unavoidable, a ne-
cessity, duáykm, ms, i.
Come forward, Tápétput (trapd,
eiut).
Few things, ÖAtya (ÖAiyos, m, ov).
Public man, Ömpotukós, ov, 6.
Voiceless, silent, àqovos, ov.
During, kará, w, acc.
Assembly, Čkk\mata, as, i.
Seek, Čntéo, ö).
That which is profitable to, rô
orvpaq)épov, w, dat.
Carry on war with, ToMepéo, ö,
w. dat.
In a wretched manner, d6Xiaos.
In a cowardly manner, kakós.
..Yet, nevertheless, àpos.
Privateer, Amotſis, où, 6.
Suffer, Táoyo.
Numberless, pavpiot, au, a.
Belong to, Tpooreival, w. dat.
Just as if, &o Tep, w, acc. & particip.
Know, ytyvöorko; be known,
'ytyvö0-kopiat.
Deed, thing done, mpāypia, atos,
Tö.
Political act, ToMitevpua, aros, Tó.
Useful, Xpmotós, m, 6v.
Commissioner, Tpeogūrms, ov, 6;
plur. Tpéo Bets, edu, oi.
Entire, whole, 6\os, m, ov.
Month, puffv, pumvös, Ö.
76 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
It is possible, is permitted, Necesse est, dváykm, ms, #; w.
Éeatu(u), (éé, eipſi). éoti (v) expressed or understood.
Nay rather, pax\ov 8é. Voluptas, jôovíl, ms, j. #
Arrive at, dºbukvéopat, oùpal eis. Domino, äre, àpxo.
Town, place, Xaptov, ov, Tó. TJrbs, TóAts, eas, i.
Maximus, uéytotos, m, ov. Expugno, äre, éktroXtopkéa), 6.
Virtus, dperff, fis, j. Imperator, 3pxov, ovtos, 6.
Omnis, Trás, traora, Tāv. Redeo, ire, dvépxoplat (āvá, épxo-
Jaceo, ere, keipiat. pal).
Oral lºxercise.
1. "To v to s elatée, While it rains, or because it rains,
walk in.
2. Tévout' àu Tāv, 6 e o 0 Tex v op vov, Everything
would be accomplished, if a god should contrive.
3. 468 a v Tos to iſ to v, Šoć divºrov to & Tov, 86-
& a v T a T a 0 t a, and 86; a v Tai Ta all occur in Attic
Greek, and are rendered, when this (or these things) seemed
good (or were resolved upon). :
4. Oütos éxovtos, or éxávrov, If this is so, or since this
IS SO.
5. "Eéðv, when, if, though, or since it is permitted or
possible; 8éov, when (if, though, since) it is necessary;
Tpoa fikov, when (if, though, since) it is suitable; 8vva Tov
ôv, when (if, though, since) it is possible; 8okoúv, when
(if, though, since) it seems good; 8.6%av, when (if, though,
since) it has seemed good; 8éðoyuévov, when (if, though,
since) it has been determined; pleMou Tuvi, when (if, though,
since) it concerns any one; aerapéNov Tuvé, when (if
though, since) some one repents; eipmuévov, when (if,
though, since) it has been spoken; yewóuevov ćir €uot,
when (if, though, since) it has been in my power; Tuxáv,
perhaps, possibly. If the principal verb is in a past tense,
all these participles would be changed to the past, when it
was, etc., has been, etc. They may also be preceded by Ös,
LESSON XIX. 77
as if, or éatrep, just as if; 6s 8éov, on the ground that it
is necessary; dºs Señorov, on the ground that it will be neces-
Sary.
To be Written.
1. When you, to whom it was an object to treat us ill,
banded together and brought indictments against us, we
came off in safety chiefly through the gods. 2. If they
had not made any accusation beyond the indictment, nei-
ther would we make in our defence a single other argu-
ment. 3. If (those) to whom it was an object to treat
them ill had not banded together and brought against them
indictments and impeachments, they would not make in
their defence a single other argument. 4. Since they have
used all (manner of) accusations and slanders, and since
they suppose that they will pass unnoticed, it is unavoida-
ble for us to come forward and say a few things. 5.
Although the other public men sat voiceless during those
times in the assemblies, seeking that which was profitable
to Philip, not that (which was profitable) to the city, we
came forward and spoke. 6. But although the city carried
on the war with Philip in a wretched and cowardly man-
ner, yet by the war itself and the privateers he suffered
numberless evils. 7. But although Philip suffered num-
berless evils by the war itself and the privateers, yet your
generals carried on the war with him in a wretched and
cowardly manner. 8. They tell what ought to belong to
public men, just as if the public man were known by
word, but not by his deeds and political acts. 9. This
useful commissioner sat down in the city three entire
months, though it was possible in ten days, may rather in
three or four, to arrive at the Hellespont and save the
towns. 10. You sat during those times in the assembly
voiceless, though it was permitted to you to come forward
and speak. 11. Though it is not possible (particip) to
78 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
know death, not even if it chance to be to the human
being among the greatest of all blessings, men fear (it) as
if it were among the greatest of evils, 12. Maximas vir-
tutes jacére omnes necesse est voluptate dominante, 15.
Urbe expugnata imperator rediit.
L E S S O N X X.
THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
References.
GOOD., §§ 279, 280. KüH., § 310.
HAD., 796 – 799. CURT., §§ 589 – 591.
HAD. El., 545, 546, a, b, c. CR., § 677.
KOCH, §§ 125–127.
Examples.
1. Oikoúv oite tºs é dpxfts eipſiums #yepov ow8 alrtos
ôv éyò º a two pat, oùre táv &AAov &v karevetſoatá uov
où8èv dAmées 8 v 8 et k v wt a v. Wherefore I am plainly
not a projector of the Original peace, and not a cause (of
it), nor does he show any of the other (allegations) which
he has falsely made against me to be true.
2. IIpótov uév, 6 ávöpes '40mwatow, Toſs 6eo's eixoual
Tàot kai Taa’ats, Šamu eivotav čxov ćyô 6, a Tex & Th Te
Tövet kai Taavu juiv, Togatºrmv Útěpáat plot Tap juáveis
Tovtov. Tov dyóva. In the first place, men of Athens, I
pray all the gods and goddesses, that, as much good-will as
I continually have both towards the city and towards you
all, so much may be extended to me from you in this
present contest. &
3. ‘AXXa biXoodºo uév čoukas, 6 weaviake, kal Xéyets
oùk dxaptata: ło 6, pleurot dućntos à v, ei otel àu Tiju
ūuetépav dpetºv Tepeyevéo 6at Tös 8aat)\éos 8vváueos.
Well, you resemble a philosopher, young man, and you
LESSON XX. 79
utter things which are not ungraceful; but be assured that
you are without sense, if you suppose that your valor
would be superior to the power of the king.
~ 5 \ N N fº y
4. KAéapxos ôé éºrè pºev Tovs Toxeptovs oùk jyev e #8 et
\
yap cal dTe up m k 67 as TOUS otpatidºtas Ical daitovs
ôv Tas. But Clearchus did not lead (the army) against
the enemy; for he knew that the soldiers were both wearied
out and were without food.
gº N & V / e * & ºn e/
5. ITpóTov pleu Yap kai pºeyva Tov of 6eów mu&s àpicot
/ / 3. 3. / e/ \ 2
koxiſovo v Toxeutovs eivat dx\ºots. Öatts 8e Toitov
/ e f* / an 3 v 3/ 5 A
a votes, avTø Tapna exºn kos, TOUTOl) eyo OUTTOT CLly
evöalpováo atput. For, first and chiefly, the Oaths of the gods
restrain us from being enemies to one another; and who-
ever is conscious of having neglected these, this man I
would never count happy.
6. "Aptatátas 86, Tretëm Te T to k 67 a eiðe Köpov,
A 5 ^ A 6/ f 5 *
kata"Teóña as d"To Too TTov Teptéreaſev at Tø. And Arta-
patas, when he saw that Cyrus had fallen, leaping down
from his horse, fell upon him (lit. around him).
an / e
7. Küpos 8 Tel ja 6e to 64 a 3e3 m coſt as, #76m.
And Cyrus, when he was aware that (they) had crossed
Over, was pleased.
N A. *
8. Taürmv Še Tºv tádipov 8aat)\ews pleyas Tote: duri
épúuatos, étrelëm Tv v 6 duet at Kūp ou Tpo a eX a 5-
vo v Ta. This ditch the great king makes as a defence,
When he ascertains that Cyrus is marching against him.
Vocabulary.
Plainly, expressed by patvouai. Well, d\\á, introducing something
See Ea. 1. new and unexpected may some-
Good-will, eúvota, as, j. times be thus rendered.
As much as, Toorooros, Šoros. Resemble, éotka, w. dat.
Continually, expressed by StateNá). Young man, weaviorkos, ov, 6.
Am pleased, jöopat. Utter, say, Aéyo.
Falsely allege, katayeſ,8opat. Ungraceful, dyāptortos, ov.
True, d\móñs, és, But, however, pºévrot.
80 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Be assured, know, oióa in the Ditch, Tâq pos, ov, i.
&mperat. Defence, épupa, aros, to.
Without sense, dvömros, Ol/. Ascertain, Trvv8ávopal.
Wearied out, direipmra (dTó, Volticris, ôputs, 100s, 6, or fi.
eipmka). Video, öpáo), 6.
Without food, Šotros, ov (a priv. Fingo, öre, TAárro.
oritos, wheat). Construc, čre, Tàyvvpu.
Lead against, àyo èiri, w, acc. Nidus, veoTrud, as, i.
Am conscious, oróvotôa éuavró. Sentio, aio 64vopal.
Neglect, TapapeNéao, ö, w. gen. Delabor in w. acc., ávrvyxávo w.
Count happy, eúðaupovića). dat.
Oath, ēpkos, ov, 6. Medius, puéoros, m, ov.
Restrain, kao)\{a}. Hostis, ToMéutos, ov, 6.
Am aware, aio 64vopal.
Oral Exercise.
1. He is conscious of having neglected, Xºvow8ev Šavrò
Tap muex m × 6s, OT Tap m peX'm k 67 v.
They are conscious of having neglected, Xvuta aort ordtortu
aitots Tap muex m × 6Tes, OI’ Tapna ex nº do ºv.
He was conscious of knowing nothing, ‘EavTó ová-
8ew ow8èv éT to T due vos, or ét to Tap Évo.
2. Paivopal & v, I am plainly (I appear being).
Aeſcuvrat āv, He shows (it) to be. -
3. "Exo v 8tateNó, I have continually (I continue hav
ing).
"Exo vºtes StateNoüatv, They have continually.
4. "Io 6, & v, Know that you are.
Oü8éva oióa a to o 0 vºt a Tows étatuouvras, I know that
no one hates those who applaud (them). --
5. Méuvm.go àv6potos év, Remember that you are
human. * *
"Avôpotov Švt a gavtov duapuluvmaik del, Always call
to mind (remind yourself) that you are human.
Méuumua toûto goû X éyov Tos, I remember your
Saying this (or that you said this).
LESSON XX. 81
'Euéuvnto eit 6 v, He remembered saying (or remem-
bered that he said). -
6. "Huo flowto éaxok via v Tāv TóAw, They were in-
formed (or were aware) that the city had been taken.
To be Written.
1. They plainly have as much good-will towards us, as
we continually have towards them. 2. We should have
been pleased, if they had plainly had as much good-will
towards us as we continually had towards them. 3. They
neither show the indictments which they have brought
against us, nor any of the things which they have falsely
alleged against us to be true. 4. Well, you resemble
philosophers, young men, and you plainly utter things
which are not ungraceful, but be assured that you are
without sense. 5. If you know that the soldiers are both
wearied out and are without food, do not lead (them)
against the enemy. 6. If they are conscious of having
neglected the gods, I shall never count them happy. 7.
They knew that their oaths restrained them from being
enemies to one another. 8. They were pleased, when they
saw that he had the position of a free boy, not that of a
domestic. 9. They were aware that the soldiers were
wearied out and were without food, when they led (par-
ticip) them against the enemy. 10. They made a ditch
as a defence, when they ascertained that the great king
was, marching against (them). 11. Be assured that you
are without sense, if you suppose the king would march
against us, after being aware that we have made this ditch
as a defence. 12. If they had been conscious of having
neglected the gods, I should never have counted them
happy. 13. I am not conscious of having made any accu-
sation beyond the indictment, although this man has used
all (manner of) accusations and slanders. 14. Volücres
vidēmus fingere et construere nidos. 15. Sensit medios
delapsus in hostes.
4 * F
82 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
LESS ON XXI.
THE PARTICIPLE (continued).
IReferences.
GooD., §§ 279, 280, 211. KÜH., §§ 310, 260, (5).
HAD., 800–803. CURT., §§ 590, 592, 595.
HAD. El., 546, d, e, 547, 519. CR., §§ 677, 618, 658, a.
Koch, S$ 125–128.
Examples.
ſº & º * / - y
1. Ei yap oiâ’ 3rt, ei Toj6' oitos ét jºy Yave v éxov,
> X 2 N. 3. / 5 3 / y 3. 2 2 w a's
ovk av avTov m covo poe v ev EXateig ô v Ta, a NA 6tri Tots
ñuetépots 6plots. For I know well that, if this happened
to be thus, we should not hear of his being in Elatea, but
on our borders.
5 3/ -
2. Kai oijk at a xúve Tov at Tov eſs Te paNaktav
/ & *A / / 5 * e/ 3/
a k (6 T To v kai Tàs bºx{TTov Švudueos d'Ét & v čva Övta.
/ A
Kpelt to 'yevéa 6at ; And are you not ashamed to reproach
(a man) for effeminacy, and to demand of the same man
that he single handed (lit. being one) become superior to
the power of Philip 2 -
* a * / *
3. IIós oijk d8 tº e?s kal 8 et v & To te?s toūTots vöv
éy ka A & v, Öv Tót' oijk eixes Aéyetv 8éAtto ; How do you
not act unjustly, and do what is shocking, in now censur-
ing those measures, than which at that time you were not
able to propose any better ? º
5 N. N A
4. "Eyð 8m Totaúty avuòe/3toka Tüx), kal T6NA & v
y y 5 2 * * /
éxo v étép eitreºu Tepe airfis Tapa Netto, ºbvXattöpevos to
* / 5 º 2 & &
Xvºrno at Tuva èv ois o'eplvövopat. Now I have lived with
such fortune, and though I might have many other things
to say concerning it, I pass (them) by, guarding against
offending any one in those things of which I am proud.
* 3.
5. 6avuao Tov Yap, épm, ti Tote of 8ovXówevot cióapi-
*A > * * *
Četv h aixeſu .... Telpóvtat 6s avvexéa Tata Towe'v à Tu äv
LESSON XXI. 83
80%Novtat 8vvatoi Yevéa 6al, .... Tavta Totočvres kai into-
/ e j SN 5/ 5 / - /
pºevoutes .... dos ovk & v &AAos dévôAoyot ye v.dple vot. For
it is remarkable, said he, how those who wish to play the
cithara or the flute.... attempt most assiduously to practise
that in which they wish to become competent, .... doing and
bearing all things.... believing that they could not otherwise
become reputable.
/ 5 N 5 / 2 / * *N.
6. Maxta T âu evöorcipuoins, ei ºf a tvo to TaüTa ar)
/ e.V. * y SM / y f
Tp a TT ou a Tows 㺠Nots &v Tpattovavy eTºTupºgoms.
You
would be most highly esteemed, if you should plainly not
do those things which you would censure in others, if they
did (them), lit. doing (them).
7. Tº ºbov; a'aq60s exate tv ép a veto.
In his voice
he clearly appeared to be weeping (but was not weeping).
Vocabulary.
Happen, Tvyxávo.
Border, éptov, ov, Tó.
To reproach, orköTTa).
Effeminacy, paxakia, as, i.
Demand, détéo, ö).
Superior to, kpettrov w. gen.
To censure, éyka)\éo, ö).
Better, 3e)\rtov.
To propose, to mention, Xéyo.
To be able, to have (the abili-
ty), Čxo.
To act in a shocking manner,
òeuvâ Totéo, 6.
To pass by, trans., Tapa)\etto.
To guard against, bu)\árrogat w.
QCC.
To offend, cause pain to, Xviréo,
6, w, acc.
To be proud, orépuſ wouai.
As if, on the ground that, be-
lieving that, Ös.
Otherwise, in any other way,
ãA\cos.
Reputable, détéAoyos, ov.
Able, Capable, competent, Öv-
varós, #, 6v.
Attempt, Telpdopal, &pat.
Practise, do, Totéo, ö).
Most assiduously, most con-
stantly, Ös ovvexéotara.
Voice, q}ovň, fis, j.
Clearly, oraq,6s.
To weep, k\ato.
Salvus, orós, orów.
Advenio, dºbukvéopat, oùpat.
Gaudeo, #3opal (admits a variety
of constructions; among others,
rarely the acc. & particip., as in
the Latin sentence 14).
Antićchus, 'Avrioxos, ov, 6.
Securus, figówpos, ov.
De, Tept w. gen. *:
84 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Romanus, ‘Popaikós, fi, 6v ; Ro- Transeo, 8tagatvo.
mani, ‘Poplatou, oi. . In w. acc. eis.
Tanquam, Ös. Asia, ‘Aata, as, i.
Oral Exercise.
1. Méuungo et Toufia at Tows Toxtras, Remember to do
good to the citizens.
Méuungo et Totijo as Tows Toxtras, Remember that you
have done favors to the citizens.
2. Méuvmaſo avópotos év, Remember that you are hu-
Iſla, Il.
Méaungo dump dyados elva, Remember to be a good
Iſla, Il.
3. ITAovtóv batvetal, He is manifestly rich.
IINovteiu haivetal, He appears to be rich (but may not
'be).
º Oiêe vulcóv, He knows that he is victorious.
Oíðe vulcău, He knows how to be victorious.
5. Méumao TNovtóv toos Tévmtas & bexeiv, Remember,
if you are rich, to aid the poor.
6. "Etvye Tapdºv, He happened to be present; or, He
was by chance present; or, He was just then present.
7. To a tpd revua Tped duevov ćAdv6avey, The army was
secretly nourished (escaped notice in being nourished).
8. IIaşa at Néyov, Cease speaking; or, Cease to speak.
'Eºravčumv Úuas oikteipov, I ceased to pity you.
9. "Hôouai ore i860, I am glad to see you.
5 Eartyaipo O'6 ei, Tpd trouta, I rejoice that you are pros-
perous.
10. ‘O 6eos Trox\dicts xaſpet Tovs prev pukpois peyd Movs
Totòv, toys 8é Heyd Movs Pukpots, The deity often delights
in making the Small great, and the great Small.
To be Written.
1. If this happens to be thus, you will not hear of his
being in Elatea, but upon our borders. 2. We heard that
LESSON XXI. 85
those who fought in the naval battle at Salamis were vic-
torious. 3. Are they not ashamed of reproaching us for
effeminacy, and of demanding that we become Superior to
the power of Philip 4. Is he not ashamed in now cen-
suring those (measures), than which at that time he was
not able to propose (any) better ? 5. Do they not act in
a shocking manner in now censuring these (measures),
when it is permitted to propose better ? 6. Though they
might have many other things to say, they pass (them) by,
guarding against offending any one in those things of which
they are proud, 7. Though you may have many things
to say, in praising yourself, pass (them) by, guarding against
offending any one in those things of which you are proud.
8. They are not ashamed to praise themselves and to re-
proach others, as if they could not otherwise become repu-
table. 9. Let us attempt to practise most assiduously that
in which we wish to become competent, believing that we
could not otherwise become reputable. 10. You would
plainly censure others, if they did (particip,) these things.
11. Men often plainly do those things which they would
censure in others if they did (them). 12. In their voice
they clearly appear to be weeping. 13. They clearly ap-
pear to be doing those things which they would censure in
others, if they did (them). 14. Salvum te advenisse gau-
deo. 15. Antiochus securus erat de bello Romano, tan-
quam non transituris in Asiam Romanis.
86 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
L E S S O N X. XII.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN réos AND réov.
References.
GooD., § 281. KüEI., §§ 284, 3, (12); 241, 3.
HAD., 804 – 806. CURT., § 596.
HAD. El., 548 – 550. CR., § 682.
ROCH, $94.
Examples.
1. El yap mu & Tao's Tpdomxa Tă pâAouta yew.joea:6at,
kai Tpoffèeoav Träutes, cai ai Tpoińeyes, Aioxium, ca.
êveuapTipov 806v cat kekpay&s, 6s ow8 ébééyéo, où8
oùtos dºr oa T at éov tº TóNew Totºrov Āv, eſtep 86áms
3) Tpoyóvov 3) toº peºNovros atóvos eixe Nôyov. For if the
things about to happen had been plain beforehand to all,
and all had foreknown them, and you, AEschines, had fore-
told them, and had testified (to them) with shouting and
screaming, (you) who did not utter a syllable, not even in
that case, would it have been possible for the city to swerve
from this line of policy (Toºrov) if, indeed, she had any
regard for reputation, or ancestors, or the coming time.
(The imperf here refers to past time, and āv is omitted in
the apodosis; yet the apod., viewed only in connection with
the condition following it, would stand-without àv. See
Gram. condit. Sentences.)
2. IIotapios 8 et uév Tus kal &\\os āpa juºv ča T.
8, a 3 at éos owk oièa Tov 8 of v Eödpårmy olòapev 3rt
döövatov 8ta&#val coxvávrov Toxeutov. And whether
We must cross any other river also, I know not ; but cer–
tainly we know of the Euphrates, that it is impassable, if
any enemies hinder (us).
3. "A To?s éA. e.v 6 épots fiyovuto eiva º Tp a k Tea,
Taota Toſs ŠoćNots dareſtov pum Toweiv. They forbade the
LESSON XXII.
87
slaves to do those things which they supposed ought to be
done by the freemen.
4. "AAAots uév yöp xprſuatſi éott ToMAa kai whes cat
iTTot, juiv 8é šćupaxov dyadoſ, oi's oi, Tap a 6 otéa toſs
'A6mvalous é o Tív, où8é Öicals kai Adyots 8 takpºt a pum
Aóyº kai avtovs 8AaTTopévovs, d\\a t t pop mTéa ev
Táxet cat Tavt. offevel. For others have in abundance
money and ships and horses, but we (have) brave allies,
whom we must not abandon to the Athenians, nor must we
wrangle in lawsuits and debates, if we ourselves also (as
well as our allies) are not harmed in word (rather than in
deed), but we must inflict punishment speedily and with
all our might. (Understand muds with airočs, as agent
with the verbals here.)
5. To v 8 ovX 6 we vow eiðaiuova elvat a odpoo dumu ſvěv
8vo, kt éov cai da kºm Téo v, dicoxaglav Šē be v c T Éo v. It
is necessary that the one wishing to be happy pursue and
cultivate sobriety, and avoid dissipation. (The agent Tov
8ovXópevov in the acc) -
6. IIept Töv Šuſu Tp a kt do v ša repov 8ovXeūged 6e.
You will afterwards deliberate concerning those things
which must be done by you.
Vocabulary.
Swerve from, dºptotapa w, gen.
Verb. adj. atroorraréos.
Regard, A6)0s, ov, 6.
Reputation, 66&a, ms, j.
The coming time, 6 p.é\\ov aid,v.
Foreknow, Tpóotôa.
The things about to happen,
ta pºéA\ovra yewſ.orea 6au.
Foretell, TpoMéyo.
Shout, 8040, 6.
Scream, kpáčo.
Utter a sound (or a syllable),
q6éyyopiat. • *
Not even, où8é.
In that case, thus, oùros.
But certainly, 6' oiv.
Impassable, döövatos 8tagnvat.
Forbid, diróðmut; aor. direirov.
Freeman, Aeë6epos, ov, 6.
Slave, 800Xos, ov, 6.
To do, TpáTro. Verb. adj. Tpak-
Téos, a, ov.
88
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Deliver up, trapačíðopu. Verb. adj.
trapačoréos, a, ov.
Ally, dippaxos; older Att. §§ppa-
xos, ov, 6.
Wrangle, 8takpivo. Verb. adj. 8t-
akpuréos, a, ov.
Lawsuit, Šikm, ms, j.
Debate, A6)0s, ov, 6.
Punish, tipopéo, 6. Verb. adj. Ti-
popmeos, a, ov.
Speedily, Šv ráxel.
With all one's might, Tavri
o:6évet.
Pursue, Štóko. Verb, adj.8tokréos,
d, ov.
Cultivate, do kéo, 6. Verb. adj.
do kn'téos, a, ov.
Sobriety, oroq poorāvm, ms, i.
Avoid, pet yo. Verb. adj. ‘pevk-
Téos, a, ov.
Dissipation, droMaoria, as, i.
Deliberate, 8ov\etopau.
Sapientia, oroqia, as, j.
Ars, téxum, ms, i.
Vivo, 8tóð, 6.
Puto, #yéopat, oùpal. Verb. adj.
#ymtéos. a, ov. -
Lingua, y\ótra, ms, i.
Modèror, eú6övo. Verb. adj. ei6vy-
téos, a, ov.
Facio, Tpárro. Verb, adj. Trpak-
Téos; trotéo, 6. Verb. adj. Toum-
Téos, a, ov.
Oral Exercise.
1. IIotapids Tus mutu Čatt ötabatéos, or IIotapadu Tuva
6 rº 2 / / 6 ex 3. /
muºv ćatt öta Satéov, or IIotapadu Tuva juºv ćatt öta/3atéa,
We must cross a certain river.
M * * e a v F.
2. Tiju TóAuv dºpewmtéov futu (or àuás), or Tiju TóAtv
6:5exmtéa muºv (or juás), or ‘H Tóxts 6%éAmtéa jutu (or
muás), We must benefit the city.
NOTE. In all these forms éotiv may be expressed.
3. Toys a vuuixovs of Tapaboréa (juās) toſs'A6mwatots,
We must not deliver up our allies to the Athenians.
4. Tov 8ovXóuevov eū8aluova eivat aſoſppoatſumu dakm-
Téov, He who wishes to be happy must cultivate sobriety.
5. Tàu 8oakmudrov čTruexmtéov (or étueMºtéa) SC.
futu (or juás), or Tà 80a ciuara étuexºtéa, sc. juſt (or
maas) (€atív may also be expressed), We must pay atten-
tion to our cattle.
... 6. Oñ Tpd ye Tås dAméetas Tupmtéos dump, A man is
not to be honored before the truth.
LESSON XXII. 89
7. Tº dàukoëvrº Šorčov číkmv, The unjust man must
suffer punishment. ... "
8. Ola Téov Tiju Túxmv, It is necessary to bear fortune.
9. Tà vöuq, Irelatéov, It is necessary to obey the law.
To be Written.
1. It is not possible for us to Swerve from these things,
if indeed we have any regard for reputation, or ancestors,
or the coming time. 2. If we all had foreknown the
things about to happen, and AEschines had foretold (them)
with shouting and screaming, (AEschines,) who did not
utter a syllable, not even in that case would it have been
possible for us to swerve from this line of policy. 3.
Whether we must cross many other rivers also, we know
not ; but certainly we know that we must cross the Eu-
phrates. 4. They know that they must cross the Eu-
phrates, a river (which is) impassable, if (any) enemies
hinder. 5. We forbade the freemen to do these things,
supposing (they) ought to be done by the slaves. 6. We
must not deliver up our brave allies, nor wrangle in law-
suits and debates. 7. We must punish the Athenians
speedily and with all (our) might, if indeed we have any
regard for reputation, or ancestors, or the coming time.
8. We must not wrangle in debates concerning those things
which must be done by us. 9. We must punish speedily
and with all our might those who are plainly the cause of
these evils. 10. Those who wish to be happy must pursue
and cultivate sobriety, and must avoid dissipation. 11.
He said that those who wished to be happy must pursue
and cultivate sobriety, and must avoid dissipation. 12.
It is necessary that those who wish to be happy pursue
and cultivate sobriety, and avoid dissipation. 13. Let us
all deliberate concerning those things which are to be done
by us. 14. Sapientia ars Vivendi putanda est. 15. Iin-
guae moderandum est tibi. 16. Hoc mihi faciendum est.
90 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
L E S S O N XXIII.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
References,
GooD., § 282. KüB., § 344.
HAD., 824–831. CURT., §§ 606–611.
HAD. El., 564 – 568. CR., §§ 564, 687.
KOCH, §§ 107, 110.
Examples.
1. Tives of v haau of Tapa toûrov Adyot Töre finóévres,
kai Si ois & Tavt’ diróAero ; What, therefore, were the
Words spoken at that time by this man, and through which
all was lost 2
2. Ti be uetſov exot Tus àv eiteſv dölkmua kat' dw8pos
Éiropos 3) et um Taita ºppovet cat Aéyet; at Točvvv obros
eūpé0ms, eita at $6éyyev kai 8xéretveis Tà Tovtovi Tpdoo-
Ta Toxuās; T âtep’ oix jºyeſ yuyváaketv attoos & a T as
e; ; And what greater injustice could any one have to
allege against an Orator than that (lit. if) he does not think
and speak the same things 2 You, therefore, were found
(to be) such a man (lit. this man). After all this do you
continue to declaim, and do you dare to look into the faces
of these men 2 Don't you think they know who you are 2
3. IIdrepov Úuºv, & &vêpes 'A6mvaſot, 8okeſ puto 60Tos
Ataxiums 3) #évos éivat 'AAédvěpov ; Men of Athens !
does AEschines seem to you to be a guest or a hireling of
Alexander ? (I think we need to invert the Order of pºva 60-
Tós and Éévos in translating, so as to convey the proper
idea.) * -
4. Kat uot Seipo, ö Méxmte, eité, "AXAo Tu Tept ToMAoû
Totel, Širos &s 8éAtta Tot of veðTepot o'ovtat ; And come,
tell me, Melétus, do you not certainly make it of much
importance, that the youth shall be as good as possible %
LESSON, XXIII.
91
/ / /
5. Mi, ajtov (se. 'Axi}\\éa) olet ºppovtſa at 6avátov cal
A.
kuvöövov ;
You do not think, do you, that he regarded
death and danger (or, Do you think that he regarded, etc.)?
* , , - 3/
6. ’ATO yap Toºtou ééeTagouévov T is t i u os altads
5 / /
éat, yeumo'etat havepov.
For from these things, when ex-
amined, it will become plain who is responsible (and) for
what.
Vocabulary.
To be lost, dTóXXvpal.
To speak, to utter, perf eipmka,
eipmual, & pass. aor. Éppñónv; re-
ferred to the present forms \éyò,
‘pmui, dyopeto; aor, act. ÉNeša,
or eitra, eitrov.
To dare, ToMuda).
To look, 3\étro.
Face, Tpóorgotrov, ov, Tó.
To think, to have in mind, ppo-
véo, 6, floo.
Hireling, plug 60Tós, où, 6.
To make of much importance,
Teph ToMAoû Tote to 6at.
The youth, the younger men,
oi veðTepot.
To examine, ééetášo.
Plain, apparent, pavepôs, d, 6v.
Responsible, airtos, a, ov, w, gem.
An injustice, an unjust act,
dôikmua, aros, Tó.
Allege, speak of, eitreºv.
Against, katá w. gen.
. An orator, fifftop, or, in courteous
language, dump fiftop, opos, 6.
Nonne 2 of ;
Num? puff;
Is...qui, 60 rus.
Generósus, yewvalos, a, ov; comp.
*
-óTepos; sup. -óratos.
Optimus, a, um, àptorros, m, ov.
Fauces, pópvyč, vyos, later vyyos,
#, less freq. 6.
Uro, kato.
Sitis, 6tra, ms, j.
Aureus, Xpwoods, fi, oùv.
Poculum, Éktropia, atos, Tó.
Quaero, (mtéo, ö, -ma’a).
Utrum...an, Tótepov (or Törepa)
... →y
Memini, pºépumpiat.
Parum, pukpóv.
Satis, dpkoëvros.
Intelligo, voéco, ö, -ãora).
Sententiam muto, petaSovXeño-
plat.
Oral Exercise.
1. AéyeTai tu katvöv ; Is anything new reported
arm / / -
2. Apa Aéyétat tº Kalvöu ;
reported ?
Is (then) anything new
92 s |EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
3. *H Aéyétat to calvöv ; Is (indeed) anything new
reported ?
4. Oi Aéyétat. To katvöv ; Is n't something new reported?
5. Mr. Aéyétat to calvöv ; There is not anything new
reported, is there 2
6. Tº katvöv Aéyétat ; What new thing is reported
7. "Hpero Ti (or § tw) cauſov Xéyotto, He inquired what
new thing was reported.
8. IIórepov Taota Tavra Totów jötket à oð; Did he,
in perpetrating all these things, act unjustly or not ? (Im-
plies an affirmative answer.)
9. Kai Tôtepov (bavāvał Tuva Tów ‘EX\ſivov Tov tatta
coxſa'ovta Toweſv airtov expāv ) pºſi; And was it neces-
sary that some one of the Greeks appear (as) the one to
hinder him from doing these things or not ? (Implying a
negative answer, and uttered with bitter irony.)
10. "AAAo Ti 3) déticobaev; Are we not certainly acting
unjustly 2
11. Ti Aadow (or Tt Traffov) d8wke's Tiju Tarpiða ; Why
(emphatic) are you wronging your country 2 (Lit. Having
learned what, having experienced what, etc.)
12. "Eatov Širov jºyavdictma as : Where (emphat.) did
you express your indignation? (Lit. Is there a place where,
etc.) s
13. The learner cannot make himself too familiar with
the common words, Tá; what or why? 8ta Tí; why?
Tóte ; when Toº where 2 To?; whither ? Th; which
way or how ! Tóðew ; whence Tós; how ! Tóorov ;
how much Tóa'a ; how many ? Totov ; Toſa ; what sort
of 2 Trvica : at what (precise) time º Trm Nicos ; how old
or how large 2
14. 'Hpópmv Tſs (Ti, Tota, Tós, Tóte, or Šarts, 3 Ti,
ôToſa, Širos, 6Tóre) Aéyot. I asked who (what, what sort
of things, how, when, he) spoke.
LESSON XXIII. 93
To be Written,
1. What words, through which all was lost, did this
man then utter ? 2. I asked him what sort of words were
then uttered, through which all was lost. 3. Do you dare
to look into the faces of these men, after uttering words
(lit. having uttered) through which all was lost? 4. How
do they not act unjustly and do what is shocking, if they
do not think and speak the same things 2 5. When these
words were uttered by this man, did nºt he think they
knew who he was 7 6. Did he seem to you to be a guest
or a hireling * of Alexander, when he uttered those words
by which all was lost 7 7. Do you not certainly make it
of much importance that the youth shall pursue and culti-
vate sobriety and avoid dissipation ? 8. You do not think,
do you, that any other river also must be crossed ? 9. If
these things had been examined, it would have become
plain who was responsible (and) for what. 10. Do you
think they know who we are, or not ? 11. Do you think
any one could have a greater injustice to allege against an
orator than that (lit. if) he does not think and speak the
same things 2 12. They asked whether he seemed to be a
guest or a hireling” of Alexander. 13. Nonne is genero-
sissimus qui optimus 2 14. Num tibi quum fauces urit
sitis, aurea quaeris pocula 2 (When thirst burns your throat
for you, you do not . . . . , do you ?) 15. Utrum hoc tu
parum meministi, an ego non satis intellexi, an mutasti
sententiam 2 s
* Observe the order in the Greek sentence.
94 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
LESS ON XXIV.
NEGATIVES.
IReferencess
GooD., § 283, 1, 2. KüH., §§ 259, 5; 318, 1, 2, 3.
HAD., 832 – 836. CURT., §§ 612 – 616.
HAD. El., 569, 570. CR., § 686.
KOCH, S 130, 1, 2, 3.
Examples.
/ *
1. Kai ei ºn * Tpoeśavéatmuev atkpów, où8’ diva)\affeiv
&v jöuvijómuev. And, unless we had rallied a little before-
hand, we should not have been able to recover. *
2. ‘O 6’ 6s dºtſ\6e clubvveča as cat drupuaa 6eſs, 8ov-
Nečeral širos a ſtro Te ét éo Tat éiri Tô déexpó. And
* º - & &
when he had gone away, having incurred danger and hav-
ing been dishonored, he considers how he shall never after-
wards be (or, he plans that he may never afterwards be) in
the power of his brother.
* * en A.
3. "Eotka yovu Totºrov ye opticpg) Tuut airó Tovtg a'odhaj-
3. c/ eM N 3 > CNN 5/ 3 & /
Tepos éival, Štt & p.m otöa ovée otoad, eiðéval. At any rate,
I seem to be wiser than this man in this very thing, a cer-
tain small particular, that, what I do not know, I do not
even think I know.
- N * / a *
4. ‘O 6e airó Néyet ui, Totmaps Taira f el 6'e u iſ,
3/ 5 / • ey 3. M \ * S/ CN: N 5 * e/
épm, aittav čets, été cat vov Tuvés föm a e airtóvtat, 6tt
oi Taxi éépired to a Tpdrewpua. And he says to him, Don't
do this : if you do, said he, you will have blame, since even
now some persons already blame you, because the army does
not quickly withdraw. -
Af an
5. Kai 6 ×okpárms intoTTeña as u iſ to Tpos Tās Tóxeos
e e / 3/ A f A c/ 2 & / e *
of Ötraffrtov elm Köpp ºbtaou Yeuéo 6au, ätt £66ket à Köpos
A º, / 5 v & 2 /
Tpo6%uos Toſs Aace&alpovious étri Täs ‘A6;ivas avattoxe-
LESSON XXIV. 95
Affa'al, ovuòovXeijet Tó Eevotbóvt. A66vta eis AeAſhows
dvakovágal Tó 6eó Tepi Tàs Topeias. And Socrates, sus-
pecting that it would be some ground of accusation against
him (Xenophon) on the part of the city, that he became a
friend to Cyrus, because Cyrus seemed to co-operate Zeal-
ously with the Lacedæmonians in the war against Athens,
advises Xenophon, on going to Delphi, to consult the god
concerning the expedition.
6, "ſlate of Tooro Séðouka pººl of k &xo 6 tº 86 €cdo Tø
Tów ºbôov, āv eſſ yevnTal, dNAa a m oijk ëxo ikavows ois
86. Accordingly I do not fear this, that I may not have
anything to give (lit. what I may give) to each of my
friends, if (our enterprise) turn out well, but that I have
not (persons) enough to whom I may make presents.
For examples of aſ in wishes, cf. Ln. X. ; for an in pro-
hibitions and exhortations, cf. Ln. XI.
* Notice that pºſſ is used in the protasis and of in the apodosis of all
conditional sentences.
t Note carefully the peculiar use of el 6& pºſ.
Rendered affirmatively
after a negative sentence ; Inegatively, after an affirmative.
Vocabulary.
TInless, ei puff w. indic. or optat.,
éâu puff w. subjunc.
To rally beforehand, Tpoečavt-
orrapat, w. pf plupf. § 2 aor. in
the act. voice.
To recover, dua)\apſºdvo.
To go away, dirépxopal.
To plan, 8ovXeñopal.
Never, oùrote, piñTrote, où8éTote,
pumöétrote ; never up to the
present time, oióeTóTote, pºm-
ôetróTote.
Afterwards, in the sense longer,
3/
GTU.
In the power of, dependent
upon, êtri w. dat.
At any rate, yoov.
Statesman, ToMutukós, où, 6.
The most, the many, oi troAAoi.
To suspect, introTTeča).
Some ground of accusation,
intairwöv Tl.
Zealously, Tpo66pos.
To co-operate with in a war
against, orvpatroAépéo, 6 w. dat.
followed by éirí w. acc.
To turn out well, to succeed,
eč yiyuopat.
96 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Enough, sufficient, ikavós, #, Öv. Aut...aut, #...#.
Ne, puff. l Now, in a negative wish, or prohi-
Cedo, eiko, -ão, w, dat. bition, piñ.
Malum, kaków, où, Tó ; 8vorvXia, Tento, are, treupéopal, Öpal.
as, i. Perficio, ere, dTorexéco, 6.
Oral Exercise.
1. Mū Tatra Tolet, Don't continue to do this * (or,
Don't be in the habit of doing this).
2. Mm Taüta Totions, Don't do this.
3. Mū Taüta Totòpev, Let us not continue to do this
(or, Let us not be in the habit of doing this).
4 Mn Tatra Trotma opew, Let us not do this.
5. Mm6els ögov TaüTa Trotmastev, May no one of you do
this. -
6. Eiðe pmöels juáv taúra étoimaev 1 O that no one
of you had done this
7. E8ov\ečeto Širos &v aſtrote étu elm étri Tô döexb6,
He planned that he might never again be in the power of
his brother.
8. Mil ſysvotto, May it not happen. Må 6opw8#ante,
Don’t make a noise.
9. 6edaagøe, 6s aaépév čott Täv, & Tu äv pm Šukaios
# Terpayuévov, Behold, how rotten is everything which
has not been justly done.
10. IIdvtos oitos éxet, édu te oč qfire édu Te pſite,
It is wholly thus, whether you deny or affirm it. (No-
tice here oi, after édv, used to negative the single word
$7te.) -
11. Aéðotka um érix.a6%ueba Tős olcače 6800, I fear that
we may forget the way home. -
12. Mi, Tajra Totſaps ei Še uſ, aitlav ćets, Don't do
this; if you do, you will receive blame.
13. El am cduous, oùk &v eiðalpovoſms, If you should
not labor, you would not be happy.
LESSON XXIV. 97
14. "Otav ai) cauums, oùk ejóatuoveſs, When you do not
labor, you are not happy.
15. Mi &rix.a66pe6a toûtov.
* rajra is often better rendered simply this than by the clumsier phrase
these things.
To be Written.
1. Unless they rally a little beforehand, they will not
be able to recover. 2. Having gone away, they planned
that they might never afterwards be in the power of the
king. 3. At any rate, they seemed to be wiser than the
statesmen in this, that, what they did not know, they did
not even think they knew. 4. If you do not think you
know what you do not know, you will be wiser than the
most (of men). 5. Don't think you know what you do
not know ; if you do, you will manifestly not be (a) wise
(man). 6. We suspected that it would be some ground
of accusation against us on the part of the city that we
became friends to Cyrus. 7. They suspected that it would
be some ground of accusation against them on the part of
the city, that they zealously co-operated with the Lacedae-
monians in the war against Athens. 8. They did not fear
that they might not have anything to give (lit. what they
might give) to each of their friends, if (their enterprise)
should turn out well, but that they might not have (friends)
enough to whom they might make presents. 9. Do not
fear that you would not have anything to give to each of
your friends, if (your enterprise) should turn out well.
10.* If they had come off in safety and with success, they
would not have suffered those things which I could wish
they had never suffered. 11.* May not the gods sanction
these things, but may they put even in these men some
better mind and heart. 12. I fear that the gods may not
put in these men a better mind and heart. 13. Ne cede
malis, 14. Aut non tentaris aut perfice.
* Cf. Ln. X.
5
G.
98 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
L E S S O N X X W.
NEGATIVES (continued).
References.
GooD., § 283, 3, 4, 5, 6. KüH., § 318, 4–8.
H.A.D., 837 – 840. CURT., §§ 617, 618.
HAD. El., 571, 572, 574. CR., § 686.
KOCH, S 130, 4, 5, 13.
IExamples.
/ *
1. Nat, ºbnaiv, dNAa to too Keddixov caxóv, to p.m 8e-
/ *N. en N *N. /5 5/ / 5 * /
p : a v ypaſhmu (bvyetv. kal um 4 eißatuáv ye, d\\a Tí
MaxNov 6 ToMAdicts uéu buyóv, a mêe T & Tote 8. §§e-
\ 2 * 3. 5 y / 3. SN \ a
Aeyx6eis déticóv, év ćyk\ijuatº yūyvout' àv Šud Totto
ðukaios ; Yes, says he, but that which was honorable in
Kephalus was the fact that he was never prosecuted. And,
by Zeus it was a lucky thing indeed. But why would he
who has been often prosecuted, and never yet convicted of
wrong-doing, fall under censure any the more justly on this
account 2
* *N /*
2. Où 'yap âu pétateſ0etu Üuás éðTet um Totaúrms oùa ms
a e 2 e A N e /
ths intrapyojans intoxinſpeos Tépì ècatépov. For he would
not seek to change your persuasion, if such were not the
existing opinion concerning each of us two.
5 º * *\ /
3. IIoWAdicts àpa eſs bpovów avptov p.m (bpovoúvrov
/ 5 ^ ^ ~ N / Of } ºdi
Kpet.TTov ča-Ti kata Tov arov A6)ov. ten, then, according
to your argument, one man, if he reflects, is superior to ten
thousand men, if they do not reflect. *
^ *N /
4. Thu Képkvpav ć8očxovro um Tp oë a 6 at Kopwóiots.
They wished not to abandon Corcyra to the Corinthians.
y fº f* ^ 5 /
5. AiyuvâTai Te havepās peu o iſ Tpeogevéuevot, 8ebtóTes
\ / 5 2 5 * 5 en
Tous 'A6mvalovs, kpúba 8é, ovX #cbata pºet avtov evnyov
3. / &
Tov Tóxepov, Néyoutes * of k elval attövouot kata Tas
a Trovãds. And the AEginetans, going as envoys not openly,
LESSON XXV. 99
but Secretly, through fear of the Athenians, helped on the
war not a little in conjunction with them (the Corinthians),
declaring that they were not free according to the treaty.
6. Ośros yap 366ket Tox\a jöm &Améeja at Totaúta, Tâ
àvta Te tos évra kai Tà un öv T a 6s of k & vºt a. For this
man seemed to have reported many such things truly
already, both those things existing as existing, and those
things not existing as not existing (i. e. if they did not
exist, he reported truly the fact that they did not exist).
7. ‘O p.m.8 eu d'êuków oil 8 evos Seitat véuov. He that
does no injustice needs no law (i. e. if a man do no injus-
tice, etc.).
8. To pm 8tratov Špyov of Nij6et 6éoùs. The unjust act
does not escape (the) gods (i. e. if any act is unjust, it does
not, etc.).
For examples of aſ w. the infin. dependent on verbs
which contain a negative idea, cf. Ln. XIV.
* Note here \éyò w. an infin. & neg, où.
Vocabulary.
To be prosecuted, to be put
on trial (as a law term), ºbeiſyo,
or, more fully, ypadºu beiyo.
To convict, ČšeXéyxa, -śo.
Justly, Śukatoos.
On this account, Ötö Tooto.
To fall under, come under, yty-
vopat év w. dat,
Censure, Éyk\mpa, atos, Tó.
Lucky, fortunate, eúðatuov, eú-
ôaupov.
To reflect, to think, qipovéo, ö,
-hoo.
Opinion, itómilºts, eas, j.
To change one's opinion by
persuasion, pretatreiða w, acc.
of pers.
To abandon, trpotepal.
Corcyra, Képkvpa, as, i.
To help on, êváyo, -ão.
Not a little, oix jRugra,
Free, autonomous, airóvopos, ov.
To tell the truth, to report
truly, d\méeño, -eńoro.
To be opposed to, vavrvéopat,
-owpat.
Contrary to, Tapá w. acc.
To deny, katapuéopat, -otpat.
In the way of, Épatroööv.
To need, require, Śēopiat w. gen.
Pavor, q680s, ov, 6.
Capio, spoken of fear, éputritto w.
dat.
Miles, ortpartórms, ov, 6.
100 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Ne, puff. - Ut, after the notion of fear, pº ot.
Mortiferus, a, um, Kaiptos, ia, wov. Labor, tróvos, ov, 6.
Vulnus, tpaipa, aros, tá. Sustineo, duéxopal (dvá, éxo) w.
Timeo, öéôouka. ClCC.
Oral Exercise.
1. Náutte a mêlév eival Tów duðpotivov 8é8atov, Con-
sider that nothing in human affairs is sure.
2. Xol to un atyńorat Novºrov fiv, d\\a 3oãv, It was
left for you, not to keep silence, but to cry aloud.
3. El Servov caxojavu Xéyetv Tov táAm6% Aéyovra, 6aoxo-
yoimv àv êyoye où kata toûtovs éival fiftop, If they call
the man who speaks the truth eloquent (8euvov Aéyetv), I,
for my part, should acknowledge that I am an Orator not
after their sort.
4. .... iva a mêlév čTax6es Aéyo, .... to say nothing
offensive.
5. Oi Tà éâuata tês oikeiôrntas Šipm 868atoju, äAA&
To Taita avudhépetv, Not the words spoken, said he, confirm
alliances, but the fact that the same things are profitable to
both (parties). -
6. O ş k épao'av iéval, They refused to go.
7. Oil 8 & To T' dºupleſv Tov calcós Tpártovta 8eſ, It is
necessary that the one who is unfortunate never be dis-
heartened.
8. 'HvavTuđêmu p.mööv Troteiu Tapa Toys vópovs, I was
opposed to doing anything contrary to the laws. . -
9. Oi an eiðótes, Any who may not know. Of oijk eið6-
Tes, Those who do not know.
10. Oi am dyadoſ, Any who are not good. Oi oijk dya-
60ſ, Those who are not good.
11. ‘O p n 8apels áv6potros of Tatēeſetal, If any man
has not been flogged, he is not educated.
12. Mukpov čébvye to un cataſterpoffival, He narrowly
escaped being stoned to death.
LESSON XXV. 101
13, Mi, Yévotto, May it not happen. (God forbid!)
14. Oik &v Ščvato, um caputºv, eúðalpovetv, You could
not be happy, if you have not been weary (or, if you have
not had trouble).
To be Written.
1. The man who has been often prosecuted, and never
convicted of wrong-doing, would not justly on this account
any the more fall under censure. 2. It is a lucky thing
indeed, if he has never yet been prosecuted, nor fallen under
censure. 3. Ten thousand men, if they do not reflect, are
not superior to one man, if he reflects. 4. If such were
not the existing opinion concerning each of us two, I should
seek by persuasion to change your opinion (or, I should
seek to change your persuasion). 5. According to your
argument, he would never be convicted of wrong-doing,
even if he should be prosecuted. 6. They declared that
they did not wish to abandon Corcyra to the Corinthians.
7. Wishing not to abandon Corcyra to the Corinthians, they
helped on the war not a little. 8. In declaring that they
were not free according to the treaty, they seemed to tell
the truth. 9. O that he would report all things truly,
both the things existing, as existing ; and if things do not
exist, as not existing ! 10. They declared that they were
opposed to doing anything contrary to the laws. 11. In
denying that they have done these things, they speak the
truth. 12. They deny that they are in the way of our
being where we have long been hastening, 13. Those
who do no injustice (i. e. if they do, etc.) need no law.
14. Pavor ceperat milites, ne mortiferum esset vulnus.
15. TimeO ut has labores sustineas.
102 EXERCISES IN GREEK syNTAX.
I, E S S O N X X VI.
TWO OR MORE NEGATIVES IN ONE SENTENCE.
References.
GooD., § 283, 7, 8. KöH., § 318, 6.
HAD., 843–848. CURT., §§ 619–622.
HAD. El., 573, 577, 578. CR., § 686.
KOCH, S 130, 7–11. 2 -
Examples.
1. O y / 5 / 5 8 * * 5 & 2 S/ /
º v Touvvu etrotºmo as ovo a pº o v Towto, o iſ 8 mkovoſe
a'ov Taütmu Tàu hovmu oijóeſs. You did not, therefore, do
this anywhere, nor did any one hear from you this language.
v 2 a
2. Kai o 58 evo's eitóutos évavtſov of 86 v, où k efirov
^ * 2 3/ A 2 3 3/ / 3. 5 A
puéu Tauta, o iſ k &ypalºa 6é, o iſ 6' éypalºa Aév, ot, k &Tpéo-
f D tº 2 2. / / 5 5/ N /
8évoſa 66, o iſ 6' étpéo Bevo a pºév, o iſ k Štreto a Sé 6m8atovs.
And when no one said anything in opposition, I did not say
these things and fail to write a resolution, nor did I write a
resolution and fail to go as envoy, nor did I go as envoy and
fail to persuade the Thebans.
5. 5 5 / 5 A
3. ‘AXX &rt y oùxī 8t' évêetav of k &Téðokas, Čk Toſſ-
Tov. 8)Xov. But that you certainly did not on account of
want fail to give, is plain from these things. (The force of
oùxt extends to the whole clause introduced by 3rt : oºk
negatives only Téðokas.)
º * /
4. Oü yüp 8: Tov Krmatſbóvta uév Šāvarat 806ketv 8'
2 / 3 v 3. 3/ 5 / ;- 3 / } \, 2 SV
éaé, épé 6', eſtep &#eXéyèeuv čvápušev, attou o iſ k &v
êypáAlpato. For surely he cannot prosecute Ctesiphon on
my account, and he would not have failed to indict me
directly (lit. Šue.... airów, me myself), if he supposed he
would convict me. (The force of the first negative, où,
extends over both sentences, and united with oſſic becomes
equivalent to an affirmative, = he would have indicted me
directly, if, etc.)
TIESSON XXVI.
103
*A º A / / * 5 *A A 3.
5. Kai Tattá plot Tavta Tetrointal, kai o Jöe is pºſitro 6
c/ * 2 5 ſ 2 N 5 A
eipp, to cat' épé, o iſ 8 eu ČNAetºb6év.
Both all these things
have been done by me, and no one shall ever find anything,
so far as depends on me, neglected.
6. Kai Šikmu of 6 et s o iſ be a a v An 8%.
And no one
certainly shall suffer any punishment.
7. El 8e yevnaðaeda étri 8aa Wet, Ti épºtočov u , odºx.
.... iSpºopévows droflavéſu ,
And if we shall fall into the
power of the king, what will prevent our dying insulted 2
(The infin, w, ui, où is rendered affirmatively after a nega-
tive expression, or question implying a negation.)
8. "ſlate Tāow alaxiviju eivat an oil ava trovčáčev.
So that all were ashamed not to unite in helping zealously.
(The infin. W. p. 7) oil is rendered negatively after an expres-
sion denoting shame, fear, impossibility, and the like.)
Vocabulary.
Nowhere, oùóapoſ), or sometimes
oùöapan.
Language, voice, povň, fis, i.
To hear from a person, droão
70. gén.
To write a resolution, to pro-
pose a bill, ypāq,a), -\ro.
To go as envoy, Tpeogewo, -ečgo.
On account of, Štá w. acc.
Want, #vöeta, as, i.
To indict, 'ypá'íopat, -\ropat.
So far as depends upon, Tô
kará we acc.
To neglect, A\etto, -yo (ev,
Åeitro).
To prevent, to be in the way
of épitoööv eival.
To be insulted, ü8piſopat.
To fall into the power of ytyvo-
plat étri w, dat.
Am ashamed, aioxiſvopat, or al-
ox{ſum pot attv.
To unite in helping zealously,
orvo Tovčáſo, -oo.
Fellowship, kouvovia, as, i.
In no way, oùöapuãos.
Oral Exercise.
Negation repeated and strengthened.
1. ‘Eyð 8 otöévoilàauoº, I had nothing to do with the
affair anywhere (lit. I nothing nowhere).
2. Oööevi ow8aph où8após oëeputau kowoutav yet, He
104 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
º e 5 * ©
has no fellowship with any man, anywhere (odëaph), in any
way.
3 O 3 8 V * 3/ 5 3. *A 3/ 5 y / 5 6° e
º 3. U O € 1/ Yap...out aloxpov ovt. attpov early, ott-
* * *A * 3/ 2 3 º
otov o iſ Tóv adov Te cdpºv o iſ k &Tour éyò caków, For there
is nothing, either shameful or dishonorable, which I have
not seen among your calamities and mine (oi.... oijk re-
peated for emphasis).
- Two negatives equal to an affin'ſnative. *
4. Ojöels áðuków Tiatv oijk droë6ael, No one that acts
unjustly will fail to pay the penalty (i. e. every one....will
pay, etc.).
Mm oãv....&v Úuas oitos éântârmae an 86to 8temv,
Let him not, therefore, for those things in which he has
deceived you, fail to suffer punishment (i.e. let him suffer,
etc.).
6. Töv 6pdºvrov oſſets odic ētaoxé tº Tiju Jºuxmy útr'
éketvov, No one of those beholding failed to be influenced
somewhat in his heart by him (i. e. every one was influ-
enced, etc.).
Mºl of w. the infin. after verbs of hindering, denying, etc., w, a negative
Tendered affirmatively.
7. "Eyð to oi k dubio.f3m.76 p.m oix} a & elva, a oſbdº-
Tepov : épé, I do not dispute that you are wiser than I.
8. Oi, coxvópeda plº, o iſ pageſv, We are not hindered
from learning.
9. Mr Tapffs to p ij od (bpdaal, Do not omit to say (it).
M”) of w. the infin., after expressions of inability and of fear, rendered
negatively.
10. Où 8twapat p ij od c 67tauvelu are, I am not able not
to praise you (i. e. I cannot but praise you).
11. Oü8é's otóate &AXos Xéyov wºn oi katayéxactos
eival, No one is able, speaking otherwise, not to be ridicu-
lous (i. e. no one.... can avoid being ridiculous).
12. Aéðotka u m of 6eputov #, I fear that it may not be
lawful. -
LESSON XXVI. 105
Où Đă, w, the subjunc. or fut. indic., an emphatic negative.
13. Oi pº Totmoo, I certainly shall not do it.
14 O iſ a fit ote ééapvos Yévoual, I certainly shall never
deny (it).
15. Oil pil a’ Gyð Teplákopal direA6óvta, I certainly
shall not look with indifference on your departure (on you
having departed).
16. Oñ um o'e duo, où8' od gº as êykataNetto, I cer-
tainly shall not leave thee nor forsake thee.
17, 4tºmu občeis ow8eptav an 86, No one certainly shall
suffer any punishment. -
N. B. The above oral exercise requires, and will repay, more than ordi-
nary attention.
* Not frequent. Oftenest found in the orators.
To be Written.
1. They never did this anywhere, nor was this language
ever anywhere heard from any one of them. 2. If they
had not done this anywhere, this language would not have
been heard from anybody. 3. We did not say these things
and fail to write a resolution, nor did we write a resolution
and fail to go as envoys, nor did we go as envoys and fail
to persuade the Thebans. 4. When they have said these
things, and have gone as envoys, they certainly will not
persuade the Thebans. 5. May we not on account of want
fail to do these things. 6. In declaring that they did not
on account of want fail to give, they spoke the truth. 7.
They would not have failed to indict me directly, if they
had supposed they would convict me. 8. No one shall
ever say that anything, so far as depends on me, has been
neglected; nor that any one through me has suffered any
punishment. 9. Nothing would prevent our dying insulted,
if we should fall into the power of the king. 10. He fears
that we may not fall into the power of the king and (may
not) die insulted. 11. Are you not all ashamed not to
5 *
106 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
unite in helping zealously.? 12. All things must be done
that we may not fall into the power of the king. 13. No
one shall ever say that we are ashamed to unite in helping
zealously. 14. May they not fail to suffer punishment, if
they act unjustly. 15. Do not have any fellowship, any-
where, in any way, with any one of those who act un-
justly.
LEsso N XXVII.
SOME NEGATIVE PHRASES.
IReferences.
GOOD., § 153, Note 4. CURT., §§ 602, 622.
HAD., 817, a, 848. CR., 559, c, 713.
HAD. El., 558, 578. KOCH, SS 78, 5, Rem. I ; 131, 44,
KüB., §§ 332, R. 12; 321, 3. R. 2.
Examples.
1. Ei yap Tabta Tpoeiro dicovitt, Trept åv où8éva
kivövvov Šut twº ov Y ūTéuetvav of Tpóyovot, Tis oùxī KOL-
Téttva'ev &v aoû pm yap Tis Tóxe6s ye, pumö Šuot. For
if (the city) had abandoned without a struggle those things
for which our ancestors endured every danger, who would
not have scorned — you ? For (let me) not (say) the city,
nor myself.
2. 'AtroAAóðopos 8e kai év Tó éuTpoo 6ev xpóvo oë8èv
éraiſeto ôakpāov, kai. 8) cat Tóte dvašpuxma duevos KAatov
kai dyavaktów ow8év a 3v t w w a ow caték\age Tów Tapóv-
Tov, TXiju ye attoſ, Xokpátovs. But Apollodorus even in
the preceding time did not cease to shed tears; and then,
at that time also, crying aloud, with weeping and violent
expressions overcame every One of those present, except
Socrates himself.
IESSON XXVII. 107
3. Tooro to è60s juás elducev, dºbó80s Te cat ueya No-
Tpetrós &Tokpávea 6a, Čáv tás tº épmtat,.... àte kai attos
Tapéxov airov špotáv Tóu EAAiſuov Tó 8ovXopévº 6 tº
āv Tus 8otºmtat, kai oil 8 evº 67 g o iſ k dTokpwéuevos. He
has accustomed you to this habit, to reply boldly and grandly,
if any one ask any question,.... because he himself also sub-
mits himself to any one of the Greeks who wishes, to ask
whatever any one wishes, and replies to everybody.
4. Oik ºv Tóte Tajta, āAA' Tº Tms dAmbetas, éyyws Tów
ëp'you, ätt Megumuévov Úuðv kai p 6 vov of k &v tats xepaiv
écaata éxövtov, Távtes éyòyvout' àu of Aóyot. These things
were not possible at that time; but the statements would
all have been made in the face of the truth, when the events
were near, while you still remembered (them) and had
(them) severally all but in your hands.
5. O Ú póvov ūTép The airów Tarpiðos, &XX & ca?
Tdams ‘EXA480s....#9exov & Toëvraketv. They were will-
ing to die, not only for their own fatherland, but also (for)
all Hellas.
6. Kai oily 37 t 6 Kpſtov čv favyiq àv, &AW a ka? of
ºbtaot attoº. And not only Crito was quiet, but also his
friends (were quiet).
7. Otual àu p.m 37 t loudstmu Tuvá, d \,\ a Tov uéyav
8aaixéa evaptôuñTovs &v eipeiv airov Taſtas (se. Tas
ăuépas kai Tàs victas). I think that not only any private
man, but the great king himself would find these (days and
nights) easily counted.
8. ‘O TTos TúTTel eis yovata kai utkpot, kākeivov če-
Tpaxi,\taev of p mu & NN' Téueuvev 6 Kūpos uéxis Tos,
kai 6 (TTos ééavéarn. The horse falls upon his knees and
almost cast even him (Cyrus) over his head; nevertheless,
Cyrus remained upon (him) in some way with difficulty,
and the horse recovered (himself).
For the use of ei Še uſ, see Ln. XXIV., Ex. 4.
108
– EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Vocabulary.
Endure, in opévo, 6.
Every, every one, où'ěels öorris
où
To fall into the power of ytyvo-
plat éiri w dat.
Philip, pi\tTTos, ov, 6.
To cry aloud, dvaſºpvyáopal, Öpact.
To overcome, break down,
KarakAáo), data).
Except, TAñv, more emphat. TAffv
'ye.
To cease, traúopat.
To shed tears, to weep, Sakpóo.
To accustom, &6t{o, -toro or -16.
Habit, #60s, ovs, Tó.
To reply, dirokpivopat.
Boldly, dºpó80s.
Grandly, pleya)\otſperós.
To submit one's self, trapéxo w.
ºréflea. pron.
An event, a deed, Épyov, ov, Tó.
Near, éyyús.
To remember, pºéuvmual.
All but, póvov oë.
Hand, xeip, xeupós, i.
Not only...but also, où padvov...
dANä kai.
In behalf of itép w.gen.
To be willing, 364}\o.
A private man, iðvárms, ov, 6.
Easily counted, eúapíðumtos, ov.
Horse, intros, ov, 6.
Horsemen, irreós, òs, 6.
Fall, Túrto.
Knee, yāvv, aros, Tó.
To cast over the head, Krpaxm-
Nišo, -io'o, or -16.
Nevertheless, où puju d\\á.
To remain on, êtrupwévo, 6.
With difficulty, p.6\ts, adv.
In some way, Tós (enclit.).
Arms, armor, ÖTAa, ov, Tá.
To hold, Éxo.
Water, Śēop, aros, Tó.
To carry away, snatch away,
ăptăgo, -oo.
Oral Exercise.
1. O Ú8évos 3 to v of Távrov &v judov caff j\ticiav
Tatip elmu, I might be, so far as age is concerned, a father
of every one of you all.
2. Oi Ševč 67 g) of k &Tokpáveral, He replies to every
OIlê.
3. Oil 86 va èpagav Švt ºv’o iſ 8akpāovt’ droatpébeaffat,
They affirmed that every one turned away in tears.
4. Oi Ndyqº u dvo v coxiiew dx^' épyo kai lemºtopatu,
To hinder not by word only, but by deed and decree.
5. O & X
/ 5 \ ^ e A. 2 *
ôt a 6 Kpátov.... d’AA a kai oi pāot attoo,
Not only Crito, but also his friends.
LESSON XXVII. 109
3. * ^
6. M7, 3rt 6eds, d \,\ a ka? &v6potrot ot ºbt)\otov Tows
Gºrto Toºvras, Don't suppose that only God, but men also,
do not love the faithless.
e \ Af 3. *\ & t ,”
7. O şx & To s to a ketºm.... a NX a cat ai 6.jpal, Not
only the furniture.... but also the doors.
5 c/ * e * 2 A 5 & *\ *
8. O ş c 67 a s Tów éavtotº Tu Tréðakev, d \,\ a kai Tôv
ūgerépov troXX& jºbjpmtat, He has not only not given any
of his own possessions, but has even taken away many of
yours. (Note this usage: not only not.... but even.)
9 O 2 ey A 3 rº 3/ 2 X. X. N 6 /
º vX O 7T 6) S Xaptu QUT O LS exeus, CL a puto UGoo as
& *\ /
a'avtov kara Tovtove Toxºtetſet, You not only have no
gratitude towards them, but, having sold yourself, you act
against these (citizens).
10. Oi advo v. ...o i öé. ... od 3 s.... à XX & ka č, Not
only.... not only.... not only....but also. (Dem., De Cor.,
93)
11. Mávo v ot; c &ti Taºs ceda\ais Tepubépovatv, All
but on their heads they carry (them) about.
12. "O a ow of Tapfiv, He was all but present (i.e. had
almost arrived).
13. Oi cét , no longer, oi, To, not yet, où Tos, in no
Iſlä.]]]]62T.
14, 29 ye of 6 & 6póv yuyváakets ow8 e dicotſov uéuum-
a'at, You, at least, not even seeing, know ; nor hearing,
remember.
15. Oük év Tó, úðatt Tà & TAa #v čxetv, e i öé wº, #97a-
Çev 6 Totapids, It was not possible (for them) to hold their
arms in the water; but if they did, the river carried them
away.
To be Written.
1. Our ancestors endured every danger that they might
never fall into the power of Philip. 2. Every one of those
present, Crying aloud and weeping, was overcome, except
Socrates himself. 3. If Apollodorus had not ceased shed-
ding tears, he would have overcome every one of those
110 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
present. 4. He wishes to accustom every one of you to
this habit, to reply boldly and grandly, if any one ask
any question, 5. He will reply boldly and grandly to
every one of you, if you ask him any question. 6. He
submits himself to every one of the Greeks to ask whatever
any one wishes, and replies to every one boldly and grandly.
7. The events at that time were near, you still remembered
(them), and had them all but in your hands. 8. If they
had not been willing to die, not only in behalf of their own
fatherland, but also (for) all Hellas, every one of us would
have incurred the danger of falling into the power of
Philip. 9. Not only Crito was willing to die in behalf of
Socrates, but also his friends (were willing, etc.). 10. I
think that not only Crito would be willing to die in behalf
of Socrates, but also his friends (would be willing), 11.
Not only any private man, but the great king himself will
find these days and nights easily counted. 12. The horses,
falling upon their knees, almost cast the horsemen over
their heads; nevertheless, they remained upon (the horses)
in some way with difficulty. 13. Don't hold your arms
in the water, if you do the river will carry them away.
14. The river almost carried their arms away ; nevertheless,
they held them in the water in some way with difficulty.
15. The river not only carried away their arms, but also
every one of the soldiers themselves.
LESSON XXVIII. 111
LESS ON XXVIII.
PRINCIPAL USES OF Ös, Čortrep, Öorre,
- Examples. $$.
1. To prev Yap Trépas, 6s &v 6 8aluov 8ovXm6), Távrov
YiyueTai : h be Tpoaipeats airm Tºv toº avaSočxov 8d.
votau &m Noſ. an on Totto 6s 38temua duov 6ms, ei Kpath-
a'at avvé8m pix{TTg Ti, adºx). For the end of all things
comes about, as the deity has willed; but the plan itself
makes plain the mind of the counsellor. Do not, then, set
this down as an injustice of mine, if it happened to Philip
to conquer in battle (Ös comparative).
2. 'AAA' 6's oix &taura öga £vāv kat' duépôtivov
Aoyaguou exóumu,.... à 6s of caxa kai Tàs Téxeos &#ta
Tpdyaata évéatma dumu can dvaykata, Taütd uot beišov,
Kai Tôr' #6m karmyépet pov. But that I did not choose all
things which it was possible (to choose) according to human
calculation,.... or, that I did not set on foot measures that
were honorable, and worthy of the city, and necessary, show
these things to me, and then at Once accuse me (6s declara-
tive).
3, X'vuòovXečo yo Tov čvöpa Tootov čkºrošov Toteto 6at
6s Táxtata, Ös unkéta Šēp Tobrov (bvXatteo 6at. I advise
that this man be put out of the way as soon as possible, in
order that it may no longer be necessary to guard ourselves
against him. (The first dºs comparative, the second final.)
4. Kai éti Tºv yeſhvpav Tot Typntos Totapoſ, Téunlºat
kevetovot (bvXakºv, 6s 8tavoeſtat airmv Año at Tagahép-
wns Tās vuktós, éav Ščumtat, Ös pm 8tagāte. And they
bid (you) send a guard upon the bridge of the river Tigris,
since Tissaphernes intends to destroy it in the night, if he
can, so that you may not cross over. (The first 3s causal,
the second final.)
112 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
5. ‘ſ’s 8e Topewouévov čekiſuawé tº ths havayyos, to
étrixstarčuevov ºpéato 8póuq, 6eiv. And when, as they
were marching, a part of the line bent outward, that which
was left began to run hastily (Ös temporal).
6. Kai évetúyxavov tábpots kai aixòow iſèatos Twipe-
atv, Ös ui, 8%uaa 6a, 6tašaivetv &vev yeſhvpóv. And they
fell in with ditches and canals full of Water, so that they
were not able to cross over without bridges (Ös W. infin.
denoting purpose or result; i. e. djs consecutive).
7. "ſ) a Tep airoi oik &v détºo atte calcós dicotetv into
Tów ūuetépov Tatēov, oùto plmöe toūto étutpérete Tepi
Too Tarpos 8Xao (bmuelv. Just as you yourselves would
not think it proper to listen to evil remarks from your own
children, so do not permit this man to speak ill of his father
(óa Tep, intens, form of Ös comparative).
8. To 6eſov Totodrow kai Toa'oùTóv éattv, & a 6° àua
Távra öpāv kai Tàut' dicotetv kai Tavtaxoi, Tapeival.
The divine (being) is of such a character and so great, that
he at once sees all things and hears all things and is every-
where present. (&are is followed either by the infinitive
or by the indicative. With the infin. it usually, but not
always, takes the negative pºſſ; w. the indic, usually, not
always, où. The difference in meaning between the two
negatives, also between the indic, and infin, is generally
perceptible.)
Vocabulary.
End, termination, Trépas, aros, Tó.
To come about, to become,
yiyvopat.
The deity, 6 6aipov, ovos.
The divine (being), to 6etov, ov.
To will, to wish, 800Xopat.
Plan, scope, purpose,
Tpoaipeats, eos, i.
aim,
Mind, thought, 8távota, as, i.
Counsellor, orápióov\os, ov, 6.
To happen to a person, orvp-
8atvo w. dat.
To set on foot, €vtortmut.
A measure, deed, transaction,
Tpāypia, atos, Tó.
Honorable, KaNgs, h, śv.
LESSON
XXVIII. 113
To choose, aipéopat, -oopal.
Human, duépôtruvos, m, ov.
Calculation, Aoytoplós, où, 6.
To advise, oupéovXewo, -ora).
To put out of the way, Škºroëöy
Troteioréal (mid. or pass.)
It is necessary, Öel.
To intend, Ölavoéopat, oùpaw.
To destroy, break down, Aſo.
The line (of battle), páAayé,
yos, i.
To begin, &pxopat.
To bend outward, ékkupatva',
-avó (ék, kūpa, a wave).
The part left, Tô TriNetTrópevov.
To run hastily (lit. to run with
a running), Öpópºp 6eiv.
A canal, ai)\ów, ovos, 6.
Full of TAñpms, es, w. gen.
On foot, Teó.
To construct, Čečyvvpu, -éo.
Just as, Šotrep.
To think proper,
P *
dévôo, ö,
-ó O'Cº.),
To listen to evil remarks, ka-
kós drovo. -
From (denoting the agent or doer),
ūTó w. gen.
Child, Tais, Tatóós, ò, or ).
To permit, Turpétro, -yo.
To speak ill, 3Åaorqºmuéo, 6,-horo.
There are those who, some
persons, éotiv of ; oftener in the
mom. eioſiv ot; but in the gen.
éortiv ćv, of some ; dat. §orriv
ois, to some; acc. otiv oës,
some, as obj, acc.
To deny, où pmut.
At once, at the same time, àpua.
Ut, relat., &s ; ut, final, Ös.
Vinum, oivos, ov, 6.
AEtas, j\tkia, as, i.
Vetustas, Taxatórms, mros, ).
Coacesco, ööös yiyvouai.
Edo (infin. esse or edere), €o 6to.
Oportet, Sei, or Xpñ. -
Vivo, vivere, Čáo), f wsu. 3,60'o-
plat, aor. £8tov.
Oral Exercise.
1. 3s relative (or comparative).
dºs 800xet, as you wish; 6s pixos, as a friend; dºs éuot
*N - e 3. / e e 3 rº /
Šoket, or simply dos spot, as it seems to me; 6s éuſ, 86&n,
in my opinion; 6s yépovtt, in the judgment of an old man;
e 5 CN / - e - e e /
dos ièóvtt, in the judgment of one looking on; ©s TAriflet,
in the judgment of the multitude; ás ye ééatºpums dicotſ-
a'avtt, at least in the judgment of one who suddenly hears;
tos Táxtata, most quickly, as quickly as possible; 6s étt
To Toxtſ, and a stronger expression, Ös étri to TXeſatov,
e 5 * e € /
for the most part; 6s dAmóðs, very truly; 6s étépos, far
otherwise.
II
114 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
2. 3s temporal. -
djs Tpoºr) &yevsto, when the rout commenced; 6s
Taxwata éos ūTéhawev, as soon as dawn appeared.
3. Ös causal.
e * &
dos Suavoettau, since (because) he purposes.
4. Ös final.
6s un ötašâte, that you may not cross over.
5. 6s declarative.
y 3. a > \ e 5 V / e an
oùTote épeſ owbels ös éyò Tpoéðoka juás, never shall
any one say that I betrayed you.
6. Ös with the infinitive.
5 * *
6s eitreºv, or oftener Ös étros eitreºv, to speak frankly,
to use this somewhat strong expression; ©s a vurduos
eitreºu, Ös év 8paxeſ, eitelv, 6s avvexóvt. eitreºv, to speak
º - / * º
concisely, to speak briefly; 6s ye plot 8okeiv, as it seems to
Iſle.
7. Ös with a participle.
6s aijtov dirokrevöv, as if to put him to death; 6s
oùtos éxövtov, as though things were so.
8. §s before a preposition.
6s éiri IIwatóas, as if against Pisidians; dis étrº vavua-
/ e & 2 5 * e
Xiav, as if for a naval battle; &s Tap Éaoû, as if from me;
so too 6s Tpds, 6s els, djs diró, etc.
9. (js as a preposition, chiefly w. the names of persons,
= Tpds. *
/ -
djs 8aaixòa, to the king.
10. djs in exclamations.
&s a drudget Tatip, how your father dishonors you!
& 5 *A e 3/ 6 } - | li h tº th
djs dateſos é àv6poros, what a nice man! (lit. how nice the
e e / /
man ) is intepôéðotkä gov, how I fear for you!
11. djs with numerals.
djs 8taxiwot, about two thousand; dis Trévre pud Mata,
about five at most.
LESSON XXVIII. 115
12. CŞs in some elliptical phrases.
djs écartos, Škaa tot, each separately; dis Tú, as if what?
i. e. to what end ?
13. 6s with the infinitive, in the sense of Öate, denot-
ing purpose or result.
djs an 8%waaffat, so that (they) were not able; dis um
&TTea 6at Tijs capſbms to $80p, so that the water might not
touch the hay. -
To be Written,
1. He said that the end of all things came about as the
deity has willed, but that the plan itself made plain the
mind of the counsellor. 2. If it should happen to Philip
to conquer in battle and you should set this down as an
injustice of mine, you would yourself act unjustly. 3. Do
not accuse us, unless you are able to show that we did not
set on foot measures that were honorable, and worthy of
the city, and necessary. 4. That we do not choose all
things which it is possible (to choose) according to human
calculation, these things you will never be able to show.
5. He said he should advise that this man be put out of
the way as soon as possible, in order that it might no
longer be necessary for us to guard ourselves against him.
6. They said that he intended to destroy the bridge by
night, if he could, in order that we might not cross over.
7. Since they intend to destroy the bridge by night, if they
can, in order that we may not cross over, we will send a
guard upon it. 8. And when a part of the line began to
bend outward, as they were marching, that part which was
left ran hastily. 9. If they fall in with canals full of
Water, So that they cannot cross over on föot, they will
construct bridges, in order that they may be able (to cross
over). 10. Just as you yourselves do not think it proper
to listen to evil remarks from your own children, so
you did not permit this man to speak ill of his father.
tº
*
116 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
11. There are those who deny that the divine (being) is of
such a character and so great that he at once sees all things
and hears all things and is everywhere present. 12. Do
not permit this man to speak ill of the divine (being), if
you suppose he is of such a character and so great that he at
once sees all things and hears all things and is everywhere
present, 13. Socrates said the divine (being) was of such
a character and so great as at once to see all things and
hear all things and to be everywhere present. 14. Ut
non omne vinum, sic non Omnis aetas vetustate coacescit.
15. Esse oportet ut vivas, non Vivere ut edas.
J
L E S S O N XXIX.
THE PRINCIPAL IT,LATIVE CONJUNCTIONS.
Examples.
1. "Ap' of v ow8 éAeyev, & Tep ow8 éypadev, juica
&pydaaaffai Tu 8éot kaków ; ot, weu of v jv eitreºu répp.
Did he, then, fail to speak (just as he did fail to write a
resolution), at a time when it was needful to do some mis-
chief ? It was not possible, indeed, for another to speak
(i. e. AEschines occupied all the time). (The first of villa-
tive, the second confirmative.)
2. Tà pieu of u carmyopmuéva Tox\a cat betwd, kal Tepi
àu éviov Aeydxas kai Tas éaxatas oi vduo, 8v86aat Tipo-
pias. Now surely those things alleged (against me) are
many and serious; and for some of them the laws pre-
scribe great, even the extreme, penalties (oív continuative).
3. Očkovy &v écºiſyot ye Tiju Tettpop.éumv. He surely
could not escape that which is fated.
4. Oikoúv uéxpt Töv xpóvov ćceivov, Év ois Taüt'
étpdx6m, Távtas duopoxóymaat Tows xpovovs Tā āpaata
.*
LESSON XXIX, - 117
Tpdºttetv Tº TóAet. Wherefore, up to those times in which
these things were done, during all the time (lit. all the
times) I am acknowledged to have done what was best for
the city (lit. I have been acknowledged to be doing, etc.).
5. El To v v v Tus éporto 6 vt two Úv Tiat Ta TXeiata
d'âttiros &v catérpače 8tºokrigato, Távtes àv eſtotev Tó
atparotéâq, Kai Tô 8.66was kai 8tabòeipelv Tows tº Tów
Tpayuárov. oi ko Öv Tóv učv 8vudueov ošte köptos oš6
#yeudov ju éyò, & a Te oč6' 6 Adyos Töv kata Taüta
Tpax6évtov Tpos éué. If, therefore, any one should ask
any man whatsoever by what means Philip achieved the
most of his successes (lit. accomplished the most of those
things in which he succeeded), all would say, by his army
and by bribing and corrupting those at the head of affairs.
Now I was not master nor leader of the military forces;
wherefore the account respecting those things accomplished
by these means is not (to be presented) to me.
6. At 67 ep fióðv éatt kai da baxéo Tepov del Toſs éx6poſs
ūTmperojuta pto 6apweiv h Tāv Štěp ju6v éxówevov táštv
Toxtte‘ſea-6at. Wherefore, it is always easier and safer to
receive pay in the service of our enemies than to discharge
the duties of a citizen, having chosen one's position in your
defence.
7. 'AAA' àpa, & Méxnte, um of év tá, ékk\mata, oi
ékk\mataotai, 8tab6eipova, Tovs veotépous; 3) cakeºvot
Áext{ovs Totodotu &Tautes; Kūkeivot. ITâutes āpa, djs
êoukev, A6muaſo, kaxovs kāyatows Totovo, TXàv ćuot, €yo
8è uévos Stad,0eſpo. But then, Melétus, those who are in
the assembly, the ecclesiasts, do not corrupt the younger
(citizens), do they 2 Do they also all make them better ?
They also (make them better). Accordingly, all the Athe-
nians, as it seems, make them honorable and good except
me, but I alone corrupt them.
118
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Vocabulary.
When, at the exact time when,
jvika.
Therefore, o&v (postpos.).
Indeed, pèv ogu (postpos); piév
before očv = piñv.
To do, perform, perpetrate, ép-
'ydéopat.
Mischief, harm, evil, kaków, où, Tó.
To speak, Aéyo. Often in the aor.
eitrov.
Now, as continuative particle, oùv.
Prescribe, give (in speaking of
law and penalty), Ötödepºt.
Extreme, éo Xaros, m, ov.
Penalty, punishment, Tuptopia,
as, i.
To allege (something against
a person), karmyopéo, 6.
Even if, kai si.
Fated, Terpopuévos, m, ov. The
verb is defective & in most forms
only Epic.
To acknowledge, dvopoxoyéo, ö,
-ào'o.
To achieve, to organize, 8voukéco,
6, -ão'o (Šud, oikéo).
Successes, things in which
one succeeds,á karatrparret Tus.
To corrupt, Suaq,6eipo.
At the head of, Širt w. gen.
Affairs, trpáypiata, Tá.
To bribe, Štěopu, in some connec-
tions.
To receive pay, puto:6apvéo, ö,
horo.
In the service of, serving, par-
ticip. of intmpetéa), 6.
An enemy, ex&pós, où, 6; an en-
emy (in war), Toñépuos, ov, 6.
Easy, fidèlos, a, ov; comp. §§ov;
sup. Ögo-Tos.
Safe, dorqa)\ſis, és; comp. -éo repos;
sup. -éotaros.
A position, Tášus, sos, j.
It seems, Éouke(v), perf. as pres. ;
pluperf. §§kew as imperf.
Better, 3e)\tiow, ov, comp. of dya-
6ós.
Except, TXàv w. gen.
Socrates, 20kpárms, ovs, 6.
NoTE. In selecting the proper
illative conjunc. for the English
wherefore, therefore, accordingly, etc.,
study carefully the examples.
Satisfacio, dpéoko w. dat.
Sed, d\\á.
Quot...tot, Öorot, at, a,...too ourou,
too attau, too atta.
Homo, ävépatros.
Sententia, yuápam, ms, i.
Tallor, ééatraráopal, Öpat; falli,
ééatratmönval.
Possum, Śāvapai.
Servus, 800Aos, ov, 6.
Sepelio, 6áTrø.
LESSON XXIX. 119
Oral Exercise.
Principal uses of otv.
1. Confirmative; in the phrases, Távv ačv oiv, où aev
oãv, dAN' offv, yap oiv, 8 oiv, and in some combinations
after other particles.
Aet yap oiv, for it is certainly necessary; kal yèp of v
Tpéret, for it is certainly becoming; aéNAo ‘yap of v &rta
iatv ćpeºv cai ãXXa, Éd ois toos &omoea 6at, for I am cer-
tainly about to say to you some other things also, at which
you will perhaps cry out; Tāvta prev oiv Troteiu Tia Tavtat,
they know how to do all things certainly; Tº 3’ oivo Tpattà
Tóte dºréðoke Kūpos uta'60w Tertápov pumvóv, but certain
(it is that) Cyrus then gave to the army pay in full for four
months.
2. Illative, the most frequent use.
Taúrms of v čveka Tſs Tapóðov Köpos Tās vaēs pere-
Trépºrato, wherefore, on account of this pass, Cyrus sent
for the ships; * 'cal yèp of v štia Tevov airò al TóAets,
accordingly, the cities trusted him.
3. Continuative.
Kūpos uév of v oitos éréAeëtmaſev, now Cyrus thus
died; KXéapyos pév of v Toa atta eitrev, now Clearchus
spoke such things; et of v ae, ôtep eitov, Tri Toitous
dqāotte, if now, as I was saying, you should acquit me on
these conditions.
NotE. It is sometimes difficult to decide whether it is preferable to
regard of v as intensive, illative, or continuative. Cf. kal Y&p oth, 1 & 2.
4. With relatives, to strengthen and generalize the idea.
El Toivuv Tus épotto 6 vt two Úw, if, therefore, one should
ask any man whatsoever (quemcunque); 3ros oiv, or öToa-
obv, or öTroo Tuobv, in any manner whatever.
5. Oikoúv.
Oüko Övölöda kouev airóv, d\\a pºm Novéopópev, where-
fore, let us teach him, but not reproach (him).
120 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
6. Očkovv. -
Oükov v Štreičn begua Tööe Teptéaxeſv; will you not
hasten to cast bands around this one o iſ cov v špe's Tot',
eir dataxNax6els áTet; will you not at length speak,
then, being dismissed, go away ?
* Uses of tipa.
1. Confirmative.
Kai eikötos &p a (Tà iepā) oùk éyòyveto, and with
reason certainly (the sacrifices) did not become (favorable).
2. Illative.
IIdures àpa A6mvatot caxois cdyaôows Totočat TXiu
éuot, accordingly, all Athenians, except me, make them
honorable and good.
3. Ei àpa, àu ápa, if perchance.
Uses of viv, a weakened form of vov,
1. Time, now. 2. Illative and continuative, then, there-
wpon, therefore. 3. Intensive, běpe vvv, come now ; Tls
vvv, who now % Frequent in Homer. The strengthened
form Točuvv, post-Homeric, is very frequent in later writers.
Toiyap, totyáptot, Totſyapotºv, and Čate are also used as
illative conjunctions.
* When the particles kai yüp offv begin a sentence, each particle retains
its proper force (and, for, therefore), and the sentence thus introduced sus-
tains to the preceding a copulative, causal, and illative relation, all at
once. We cannot easily render them all into English, and hence only
render that one the meaning of which seems to us most important in the
connection. The same principle will apply to Totºyapoju, Toiyap, totyáptol,
Kai Yáp, etc.
To be Written.
1. When therefore, it is necessary to do some mischief
(by speaking), it is not possible indeed for another to
speak. 2. If, therefore, it is necessary to do some mis-
chief (by speaking), it will not be possible indeed for
another to speak. 3. Now the laws prescribed great, even
LESSON XXIX. 121
the extreme penalties for many of those things alleged.
4. Now, even if the laws had prescribed great, even the
extreme penalties, he would have spoken when it was
necessary to do some mischief (by speaking). 5. He surely
will not escape the penalties that are fated, if he does any
mischief. 6. Wherefore, up to those times, it was ac-
knowledged that all things which were best for the city
had been done. 7. If, therefore, you should ask any man
whatsoever, by what (means) they achieved the most of
their successes, he would say by corrupting those at the
head of affairs. 8. If, therefore, we had asked any man
whatsoever by what means the enemy achieved the most
of their successes, all would have said, by bribing and cor-
rupting those at the head of affairs. 9. Wherefore, he
always received pay in the service of our enemies, suppos-
ing it was easier and safer than to choose his position in
your defence. 10. Wherefore, do not suppose it is easier
and safer to receive pay in the service of our enemies, than
to choose your position in behalf of the city. 11. Where-
fore, do not choose your position in behalf of our enemies,
since it is (gen. abs.) easier and safer to serve the city.
12. Accordingly, all the Athenians, as it seemed, made the
youth better, except Socrates, but he alone corrupted them.
13. Accordingly, you would not be able to persuade any
man whatsoever that we corrupted the youth. 14. Mihi
non Satisfacit. Sed quot homines tot sententiae ; falli igi-
tur possumus. 15. Itaque a servis sepultus est.
122 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
L E S S O N X X X.
THE PRINCIPAL. INTENSIVE PARTICLES.
8%, 876ev, 8% trou, Săra, Yé, Yoov, Trép, pºv.
Examples.
1. ‘O 8 oiv Tao aſbepuns 6s uetov exov dºrm), Náym,
Taxw uèv oilk duao Tpépet,” eis 8e to otpatóTeêov dºbukó-
aevos to Tów ‘Exxiivov ćiceſ avutvyxãvet” &aatkeſ, cai
ôpoſ, 8m f TúAw avvtašáuevo etopečovto. And now Tis-
saphernes, when being worsted he withdrew, did not again
turn back, but on arriving in the camp of the Greeks there
fell in with the king, and now again drawing up their lines
together they proceeded in company (8m denoting time).
2. Oi Tóu 8aa lºvéov oivoxóot, €Tetööv Štěóat Tºv bed-
Amu, dpija'avtes dir' attàs Tó kvá09 eis Tiju dpa Tepāv
xeſpa šyxeduévot catappoibovat, Toº 8 fi, et bäppaka
éyxéotev, an Ava trexév attoºs. " The cupbearers of the
kings, when they offer the bowl, drawing from it with the
cyathus, pouring it into the left hand, swallow down (what
they have thus drawn out), in order no doubt that it might
not profit them, if they should pour in poison (into the
bowl). (8: used to call attention to a particular statement
and emphasize it.)
3. Toºro 6 m to &yos of Aakeóatuávuot Aaúvetv čkéNevov
8%6ev toſs 6eois Tpótov Tuopoèvres, eièótes 8e ITepukxéa
Tov Eav6/77rov Tpoo exãuevov airó kata Tův umtépa kTé.
This pollution, I say, the Lacedæmonians exhorted (them)
to drive out, primarily, forsooth, avenging the gods, but
knowing that Pericles, the son of Xanthippus, was impli-
cated in it on the mother's side, etc. (8% resumptive, taking
up a statement after a digression.)
4. "Exeyóu Tuves 3rd cattöotev otpatevua éööket 8 m
Toſs otpatmyots owk da baxes éivat Staakmuodv. Some said
LESSON XXX. 123
that they descried an army; accordingly it seemed to the
generals to be unsafe to encamp apart. (8: illative.)
5. Kal Yap oùv # TAeta Tot 3 m airó evá ye dvöpi Tów
éd fiaſov ćite6%ama'av kai Xpiuata kai Tóxels kai Tà éav-
tów adjuata Tpoéa 6al. Accordingly, very many persons
desired to commit to him more than to any other one man
of those in our time both treasures and cities and their own
bodies (lit. to him, one man at least, of those in our time).
(öm emphasizes the superlative; ye restricts the statement
to €vi dvěpá and emphasizes these words.)
6. ’ſ) X6kpates, éyò uèv ćumu Tovs bºoooſhooutas
evèatuoueatépovs xpñvat yūyveg 6a, at 8é uot boxeſs td-
vauria Tăs bºoooºbias droxexavkéval ºs y o iſ v oitos,
djs ow8 àv eis 800Xos into beatótt, 8tattººevos uéivetev.
O Socrates I supposed that those pursuing philosophy
ought to become more fortunate; but you seem to me to
have acquired from philosophy the opposite (of prosperity);
at least, you live in such a way as not even a slave subsist-
ing under a master would stay (with him).
7. "AAAa pºv et Tis y & Tº airó Tpoatãfavtt kaxós
ūTmpetija elev, ośćevi TóTote dxapuatov elage Tiju Tpoôv-
atav. Tolyapotiv kpótta to 8 m ūTmpétat Tavros épyov
Kºpp &Aéx6ma'av yewéa 6at. But further, if any one served
him well in any appointed task (lit. served him well, hav-
ing appointed or enjoined anything), he never left the devo-
tion of any one unrewarded. Accordingly, Cyrus was said
to have for every enterprise the very best coadjutors (lit.
there were said to arise to Cyrus, etc.). (uſu introduces a
new and emphatic statement; yé imparts emphasis to Tis
and is best rendered by emphasizing the Eng, any one; 37;
often emphasizes a single word, as here kpóttarot.)
* duaa Tpéqet and a vurvyxável are historic present, and are better ren-
dered here by the past.
t According to Curtius (Grundzüge, p. 560), 6%, Lat. jam, German ja,
Eng. yea, yes, are from the same original stem : 6% sustains to #6m the same
relation as prºv to fi Ahv.
† See note, Ln. XXIX., Oral Exercise, p. 120.
124
EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
Vocabulary.
To be worsted, pelov čxeuv.
To withdraw, dira)\\dºtopat.
Now again, 8) (postpos.) TáAuv.
To fall in with, orvurvyxávo w.
dat.
In company, together, Öpoo.
Cupbearer, oivoxãos, ov, 6.
To draw, dpéo & dpåro (fāpāoro,
doubtful), aor. #pwora, (pf #pu-
ka, doubtful).
A bowl, drinking-bowl, pud Mm,
ms, i.
Cyathus, kūaôos, ov, 6, a cup for
dipping or drawing from the kpa-
Táp (micer), or from the drink-
ing-bowl. s
To pour in, Čyxéo, f, like the pres.,
also êyxeó, aor. Évéxea; mid eve-
Xeónmu.
Left, as op. to right, dpuo repôs, d, 6v.
To swallow down, karappoq’éo,
à, -ãoro.
In order that, too w. infin.
No doubt, 8%.
To profit, Avorite)\éo, ö, -ãoro.
Poison, páppiakov, ov, Tó; often
plur. (pappaka, drugs.
Pollution, äyos, ovs, td.
I say, 8ff (resumptive).
To drive out, ÉNativo.
To avenge, tuplopéo, ö, -noro.
Primarily, trpótov.
Forsooth, 876ev.
Pericles, IIepuk\ſis, éovs, 6.
To be involved in, Tpooréxoplat
w. dat.
On the side of, kard w, acc.
To commit, Tpoinut.
Accordingly, used in this lesson
to render öff, & also kai yap oiv;
in a former lesson àpa.
Those in our time, our con-
temporaries, oi ép' juáv.
Treasures, Xpſiuata, drov, tá.
Body, orópa, atos, Tó.
Those who are pursuing phi-
losophy, oi (pt)\ooroºboovres.
Ought, Xph, in that form which the
construction requires.
Fortunate, eúðatugov, ov; comp.
-éo repos, sup. -éotaros.
In such a way that, oùros &s.
But further, àAA& puñv.
To leave, allow, suffer, édo, £6,
-ágo.
Devotion, readiness to serve
a person, trpo6vpia, as, #.
Unrewarded, dyāptorros, ov.
Šed nimirum, d\\'oùv, d\\ā 8%,
dN\& 87ta.
Major, pleíčov, ov.
Quidam, tis ye.
Quam, #.
Opinor, otopiat.
LESSON xxx. 125
Oral Exercise.
1. Uses of 8%.
(1) Time, nearly = #8m.
‘O Tatmp kai fi pºſtmp TāNat 8 m éretexevticea av, his
father and mother were already long ago dead; Tô vöv 8 m
yeyevnuéva, those things which have just now (now already)
taken place; &rei kai évraú6’ exºpovy oi "EXAmves, Net-
Trovo. 83) Tov Adºbov of Tireſs, when the Greeks were pro-
ceeding there also, the horsemen at once leave the hill;
Xéye 8 m, speak now ; dye 8 m eité, come now, speak; exe
8 m, hold now ! wait now !
(2) 8m intensive. Often placed after a word to empha-
size that single word. Several expressions above given
might come under this head.
Oüx oitos éxel ; éxet 8 m, is it not so 2 it is so, in-
deed; oitos 8 m, just so; Tú 8 m, what now 2 or, precisely
what ? Troö 87, just where? uéytotos 8 m, the very greatest;
TAetortot 8 m, the very most; 6s 8 m, the particular one
who ; ca. 87) kal, and in particular also: el 8%, if in-
deed.
(3) 8% continuative and illative.
Ottos uéu 87 totaúta eiteu, this man accordingly spoke
thus; posta épotó 8m, askſ I ask then.
2. 876ev, forsooth, a strengthened form of 8m, used chiefly
In Irony.
Oük étº coxéum dANd Tapauvéo et 676ev, not to inter-
pose any obstacle, but to offer advice, forsooth.
3. 8ſ. Tov, and a stronger form, 8 ſtov6ev, are also used
ironically, and in statements admitting no doubt.
"Io Te 3rtov, Š9ev #Atos dutoxet can & Tov 86eral, you
know, doubtless, where (lit. whence) the sun rises and
where it sets; 3rav čari Toi, ºrtov Yévoual, Tà Tot, iTTo-
keuratºpov 8 to v 6e v 8tatpd'éopat, when I am mounted
on the horse, I shall perform the deeds of the hippocentaur
no doubt.
126 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX.
4. Śāta a strengthened form of 8%.
Ovčapºs épa bef dētketv of 8 fita, it is not, then, by
any means necessary to do wrong, is it ! No, certainly
Mm 677', 6 Tóvres 6eoſ, uměels Taj6 juáv étueéo etev,
may no one of you surely, O all ye gods, sanction these
things
— ` / * wº g g * , tº
5, Yé (enclit, and postpos) is intensive and restrictive,
at least, indeed, even.
2/
frºm Byoye, I at least, I for my part; XaXerév y & ge éxéyéal,
& X6&pates, it is hard, indeed, to refute you, Socrates:
6. Yoov ()é, oiv) a strengthened form of yé.
4okeſ y o 0 v got, it seems to me certainly, it seems to me
at least.
/ sº /
.. . Tep ſendit ſº Tept, very). / tº º
Otep &eto Totmaiety Tov ASpokópav, which very thing
he supposed Abrocomas would do.
NOTE. I question the concessive meaning although, often attributed to
Trép.
8. Aftv.
Tá oiv &v eſſm Ö "Epos ; 6vnTós; "Hictata: ye. 'AXXà
Tú a #1 ; What then would Eros be 2 Mortal? By no
means ! But what then (what in fact) 7
To be Written.
1. When they were worsted, they withdrew; and now
again falling in with the king, they proceeded in company.
2. He ordered the cupbearer to draw from the bowl with
the cyathus, and pouring into his left hand to swallow
down (some of the contents), in order no doubt that it
might not profit him, if he should pour in poison (into the
bowl). 3. The kings used to order their cupbearers, when
they offered the bowl, to draw from it and to swallow down
(some of the contents), in order no doubt that it might not
profit them, if they should pour in poison (into the bowl).
LESSON XXX. 127
4. This pollution, I say, they drove out, in order, no doubt,
that they might avenge the gods. 5. In wishing to drive
out this pollution, they primarily, forsooth, avenged the
gods, but they knew that Pericles, the son of Xanthippus,
was involved in it on his mother's side. 6. Some said that
Tissaphernes had fallen in with the king, and that they
now again had drawn up their lines together : accordingly,
it did not seem to the generals expedient to fight on that
day. 7. Accordingly, very many persons committed to
him, more than to any other one man of those in our time,
both their treasures and their own bodies. 8. Accordingly
he, more than any other one man of those in our time, is
acknowledged to have done what is best for the city. 9.
Accordingly, very many persons acknowledge that he, more
than any other one man of our time, does what is best for
the city. 10. Those at least who are pursuing philosophy
ought to become more fortunate; but you now live in such
a way that not even a slave would remain (with you).
11. When it is permitted to those pursuing philosophy to
become more fortunate, they at least live in such a way
that not even a slave would stay (with them). 12. But
further, he never left the devotion of any one of those who
had served him well unrewarded. 13. But further, it is
acknowledged by all that Cyrus never left the devotion of
any one unrewarded. 14. But further, if the end of all
things turns out as the deity has willed, it is not an injus-
tice of mine at least if it happened to Philip to conquer in
battle. 15. Sed nimirum majus est hoc quiddam, quam
homines Opinantur.
AN ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY,
6 * I
AN
ENGLISH-GREEK WOCABULARY
OF THIE
PRINCIPAL WORDS USED IN THE FOREGOING EXERCISES,
A.
Administration, troXtreia, as, j.
Advantage, dyadóv, où, Tó.
Advise, orvpſ3ovXevo, oro.
Affairs, Tpaypara, Tá.
Affirm, @mput, particip. ‘pdorkov.
Afterwards, in the sense LONGER,
étu.
Again, TáAuv.
Against, katá w. gen. ; Śirt w.acc.
Allege, speak of, eitreiv; allege
against, Katmyopéo, ö, flora).
Allow, Édo, ö, äoro.
Ally, orippaxos; older Att. §§p.
Almost, ÖAiyov Šeiv, ÖAfyov; all
but, plávov oi).
Alone, póvos, m, ov.
Although, generally expressed by
the particip. alone; the concessive
idea is emphasized by kaitep.
Am to, am about to, pºéA\o w.
pr. or f. infin. *.
...Ancestor, Tpóyovos, ov, 6.
Abandon, Tpotepal (Tpg, lepial);
leave behind, kata)\ettro.
Able, 8vvarós, #, 6v ; to be able,
öövapai; to have ability, Éxo.
About, concerning, Tept w.gen.
Accept, receive, Séxopal, Šášopal,
éðečápmu, 6éðeypad.
Accomplish as a citizen, To)\t-
Tetopat.
Accordingly, àpa, Öff, kai yap oiv.
Account, on this account, Ötö.
toūro; on account of 814 w. acc.
Accusation, airia, as, h; make
an accusation, karmyopéo, ö,
fioro; some ground of accu-
sation, intraſtiáv Tu.
Accusations, things alleged,
tä katmyopmpléva.
Accuse; see Accusation.
Achieve, 8vouké0, 6, jo'o (Štá,
oiké@). -
Acknowledge, juoxoyéo, ö, floro;
duopoxoyéo, ö, flora).
Acquire, KTáopat, któpav, kthorouai,
éktmorápev, kékrmual, and éktmual.
Act unjustly, döukégo, ö, mora);
pres. often as pf.
Announce, drayyáAAo (diró, dy-
yéA\6).
Any one, Tis.
Anything, Ti;
ãAXo tw.
anything else,
6 *
132
ENGLISH-GREEK WOCABUL.A.R.Y.
Apparent; see Plain.
Appear, baivopal, pavoopal, éqm-
vápamu (trans.), Trépaopiat. In a
middle sense intrans, also êqāvmu,
qavágopal; also intrans. Tépmua.
Apprehend, seize, ovX\apſºdvo;
apprehend, fear, Šēēouka.
Argument, Nóyos, ov, 6.
Ariaeus, 'Aptaios.
Arise, come into being, yiyvouai.
Arise, become established, ka-
6ío Tapat.
Arms, Štúa, ov, Tá.
Army, otpatid; otpatevpua, aros, Tó.
Arrive at, dºbukvéopat, oùpat, dºpt-
éopat, dºbuköpumv, dºptypiat, w; eis
and acc.
As, Ös; just as, Šotrep; as much
as, toolootos, m, 0(v),...óoros, m,
ov; or antecedent omitted, Šoos,
m, ov; as many as, 60'ot, au, a.
Ascertain, Tvv6ávopal, Tetoropat,
étv6ópumv, Tétruo-piat.
Ashamed, am ashamed, aioxi-
vouat, -vuotpat, joxiv6mu; or
aioxijun plot €ortuu.
Ask, inquire, éporão, ö, flora), aor.
jpótmora, usu, pópmv.
Ask, request, ask for, 8éopal,
ôeñoropal, éðeñómu, Öeóémual, w.
gen.
Assembly, ŠkkAmoria, as, j.
Assiduously, ovvexós; most as-
siduously, Ös ovvexéotara.
Assured, be assured, imperat.
of oióa. -
At once, at the same time, àpa.
Athenians, 'Aémvalov, ov, oi.
Attempt, Treupéopat, ºpat, dep.
mid.; attempt, put the hand
to, &yxelpéo, ö, ägo (év, xeip);
étrixeupéo, ö, äoro (étri, xeip).
Attend to, ÉtrupéAopal and étrue-
Aéopat, oùpal, étrueNijgopal, éire-
peºffému, ÉtripepláAmpat (rare).
Avaricious, aioxpokepôňs, és.
Avenge, tipopéo, 6, floo.
Avoid (see Flee), behave cau-
tiously in respect to, eúNa-
8éopat, oùpal, -joropat.
Aware, to be aware, aio 6dvopat,
aio.6%gopal, ja:06pmy, forémplat.
L}.
Band together (lit. stand to-
gether), the intrans. tenses of
ovvio tmpw.
Bear; see Bring.
Because, ótt; &re w, a particip.;
often denoted by the particip.
alone.
Become, ytyvopal; become es-
tablished, kaðiotapat and the
intrans. tenses of the act.
Before; see Sooner.
Begin, dipxopal, épéopat, figáápmv,
fipypiat.
Beginning, dpxópevos, m, ov
(àpxo).
Behalf, in behalf of, Ütrép w, gen.
Behold, 6edopat, Öpiat, doropat,
éðeaordpumv.
Belong to, yiyvouat, yewſ.gopal,
éyévépumu, yé yova, yeyéumpal, w.
gen. ; Tpooreival w. dat.
Bend outward, ékkvpaiva), avó.
ENGLISH-GREEK WOCABULARY.
133
Benefaction, eúspyearía, as, i.
Better, Kpeitrov, ov; duetvov, ov;
BeXtiou, BéAttov; something
better, àpſeuvov.
Beware, imperat. of Ópdo.
Beyond, outside of, Éa, w, gen.
Bid; see Order.
Boat, TNotov, ov, Tó.
Body, arópia, aros, Tó.
Boldly, dºpd{30s (a priv. ºpó80s).
Book, 8:3Xos, ov, i.
Border, Öptov, ov, Tó.
Born, to be born, ytyvopat.
Boy, Tais, Tatóós, ò.
Bowl, drinking-bowl,
ms, i.
Bran, Tirupov, ov, Tó.
Brave, dyadós, #, 6v, in a military
S6277 S62.
Break, Aşa), spoken of a bridge ;
quáAm,
C.
Calamity, Tráðos, ovs, Tó; kaków,
où, Tó.
Calculation, Noytopads, où, 6.
Call, name,
(rare), w8w. KaNé, éká\eora, ké-
ka)\éo, ö, KaNéao
k\mka, KékAmpat, Šk\ſiónu.
Calumniate, 8tašáA\co (Štá, 64N-
A6).
Calumny, ŚwagoNſ, fis, i.
Canal, ai)\@v, 6vos, 6.
Candor, sivota, as, #.
Capable; see Able.
Captain, Noxayós.
Carry away, snatch away,
dipitáčo, ora).
Cast, imput, joo, fika, eika, eiuat,
eiðmu; 8áAAgo, Saxó, É8a)\ov, 8é-
*.
also of a treaty; break down,
KarakAdo, doro.
Breathe, to take breath, dva-
Tvéo (dvá, Tvéo, Tveijo'opiat,
étruevoſa, Tétruevka, Tétruevo plat,
étrue Öorðmu).
Bribe, Štěajput in some connections.
Bring, ºpépo, otoro, jveyka, Čuff-
voxa, Évåveypal, #véx6my; bring
against, €irdya (Éti, &yo).
Bring up; see Nourish.
Burn, consume by burning,
karakato, Karakačoro, karékavora,
katakékavka, katakékavpal, kare-
kaijómu.
Bury, 64Trø, 6áyo, #6aya, Téðap-
paw, Étépmv.
But, d\\d, Šá, puévrot ; but also,
ãAN& kai; but further, d\\a
pāv; but certainly, 6' oiv.
8Xmka, 8é8)\mual, éðAñómv; cast
over the head, ékrpaxm)\tºo,
to o, or wā).
Cause of, causing, airtos, ta, wov,
*U. gen.
Cease, traúopat, -o-opat.
Cemetery, plumpa, aros, ré, strictly
a monument, esp. in memory of
the dead; them, a place of monu-
ments, a cemetery.
Censure, éykAmpua, aros, Tó.
Censure, v., áiritupido, 6, horo;
eyka)\éo, 6, Édo, 6.
Cessation, traßXa, ms, j.
Chance, happen, Tvyxávo, Teóéo-
pat, ÉrvXov, Teräxmka.
Character, tpdºros, ov, 6.
13
WOCABULARY.
ENGLISH – GREEK
Check; see Restrain.
Chiefly, pud Mota.
Child, Tais, trauð6s, 6 or à.
Choose, aipéouai, oùual, aiphorouai,
eiNóumv, fipmual ; choose be-
forehand, Tpoatpéopat, oùplat.
Citizen, troAirms.
City, TóAus.
Clay, Tm) Ös, où, 6.
Clearly, oraq,6s.
Collect, ov)\\éyò, orv\\éča), ovvé-
Neča,
ovveMéymv.
Come, Épxopat, f. in Attic elut,
jča), áqiáopat, rare éAeūgopat,
ao. A60w, pſ. AñAv6a; as inter-
a f
ovvetMoxa, ovvetàeypal,
jec. qepe, pépe 6ii; am come,
jko; come forward, Tápétut
(trapá, eiut); come up, come
towards, Tpógeipt (Tpés, eiut).
Come about; see Become.
Commander, àpxov, ovros, 6.
Commissioner, trpeggütms, ov, 6;
plur. Tpéo:3ets, eau, oi.
Commit, Tpoinul (Tpg, impu).
Compel, dvaykáčo, -ão ao.
Competent ; see Able.
Complain, ovkopauréa), 6 mora).
Condition, on this condition
that, iri toãrg), eq, 6te; on
condition that, q & or ép'
Øre.
Conduct; see Lead.
Conquer, vukáo, ö, floo, w, acc.;
Kpatéo, 6, floo, w. gen.
Conscious, am conscious, orów-
otôa épavTó. 4.
Consider, a kotréo, ö, also okotréo-
pat, oùpat, ºf a kélopat, aor.
€orkeVrápumu, pf €o keppſal; later
orkothoro, ŠokóTmora, etc.; fiyéo-
pal ovual, fiyńoropat, fiymordumv,
#ympat.
Constantly; See Assiduously.
Construct, Čečyvvpu, Čeč0,éevča,
éevXa, ćevypal, éét X6mu.
Contemporaries, Our contem-
poraries, oi éq juáv.
Continually, often expressed by
ôuare\6.
Contrary to, Tapá w. acc.
Convict, *čeMéyxo, -ão.
Convince; see Persuade.
Co-operate, to co-operate with
in a war against, orvpatroAépéo
(orév, ToMepéo), 6, w, dat. fol-
lowed by éirí w, acc.
Corcyra, Képkvpa, as, i.
Corrupt, 8taqbóeipo; try to cor-
rupt, pres. and imperf.
Council, ovvéðptov, ov, Tó.
Counsellor, orópſ3ov\os, ov, 6.
Counted, easily counted, eúa-
píðuntos, ou (eſſ, àptégéo, ö).
Country, Xópa, as, i.
Cowardly, kakós, h, Öv; in a
cowardly manner, kakós.
Crime, unjust act, dötkmpa, aros,
Tó.
Cross over, 8tašaivo (6tá, 3alvo).
Cry aloud, 8odø, 6, f. 60mgopal ;
dvağpuxáopat, -ópat.
Cultivate, dorkéo, ö, flora); verb,
adj. do kntéos, a, ov.
Cupbearer, oivoxóos, ov, 6.
Cyrus, Kūpos.
ENGINISH –GREEK: . WOCABULARY.
D.
Danger, kivövvos, ov, 6; to be in
danger, kuwövveča); to be fore-
most in danger, Tpoktvövveto.
Dare, to pado, ö, ägo.
Darkness, okótos, ov, 6.
Daughter, 6.uyátmp.
Death, 6dvatos, ov, 6;
death, dirokretva).
Debate, A6)0s, ov, 6.
Deceive, #atratégo, ö, -morgo.
Declare, Aéya); see Speak.
Deed, thing done, Tpāypia, aros,
put to
TO.
Defendant, 6 pečyov, ovros.
Defence, Épupa, aros, Tó.
Deity, Öaipaov, ovos, 6.
Deliberate, 8ovNečopiat.
Deliver up, trapačíðapu (trapd,
ðiðopu).
Deliverance; see Safety.
Demand (on the ground of worthi-
ness), détéo, ö, Öo go.
Deny, karapuéopat, oùpat, rare;
w8w. dpvéopat, oùpat, dpuñoropat,
àpuñómu, #pump at ; oiſ pmput.
Deride, 8taye) do, (Suá, ye)\do).
Desire, étuffvpuéo, ö, flora).
Destroy, Śwaſpöeipo, öuaq,6epó, 6t-
épéelpa, Stépôapka, 8tépôappat,
ôteq,6épmv; of a bridge, Aéo.
Devotion, Tpoôupta, as, i.
Die, TeXevráo), 6, -ãoo; 6vñorko
- y z 2 *
and diroëviſorko, ätroflavoupau,
diréðavov, Téðumka; die with,
/
ovvatroëvijo-kao.
Difficulty, with difficulty, plá-
\ts.
Disease, v6oros, ov, ).
Disregard, dueMéo, ö, floo.
Dissipation, droMaoria, as, fi (a
priv. ko)\dºo, to check, chastise).
Ditch, Tâqipos, ov, i.
Distinctly, oraq,6s; comp. oraq,é-
otepov; sup. oraq,éo Tata.
Divine being, 6etov, ov, Tó.
Do, make, Totéo, ö, ägo ; Tparto,
ão, Érpača, Tétrpaxa, Tétpaypal,
€iſpáx6mu; pyášopat, doopiat.
Dog, küov, kvvös, Ö.
Domestic (subst.), oikérms, ov, 6.
Draw (of a liquid), ápéo and
dpúto, aor. iſpuga.
Drive, éAačva), áAdoro, usu. A6,
#Naora, ćNāAaka, ÉNij}\apat, Ná-
ômy; late éAñNao plat, n\dorémy.
During, kata w, acc.
E.
Each, ēkaotos, m, ov; on each
occasion, êkáortore.
Easily, eitretós.
Easy, figöuos, a, ov.
Educate, Tavčeňa), eúoro.
Effeminacy, paxakta, as, j.
Either...or, #...#.
Eloquent, Öetvös Aéyetv.
End, Trépas, aros, Tó.
Endure, Útropévo, 6 (Öttö, puévo).
Enemy, the enemy, oi ToMéutot; a
personal enemy, 6x6pós, où, 6.
136
ENGLISH –GREEK WOCABULARY.
Engagement, occupation, doxo-
Ata, as, i.
Enough, ikavós, fl, év.
Enter, embark, Šušaivo; const.
eis w, acc.
Entire, whole, 5Xos, m, ov.
Envoy, to go as envoy, trpeg-
8eño, -ečoo.
Err, duaprávo, äpapthoropat, juap-
Tov, pdptmka.
Escape, escape from, ºpečyo w.
acc.; also diroqetyo, and ékºpeč-
'yao; to escape, pass along
by, trapépxoplat.
Especially, pud Muota, Sup. of pud Ma.
Even, kat; not even, oùöé; even
if, kai ei; if even, although,
ei Kai.
Event, deed, pyov, ov, Tó.
Every, every one, oùöels öortus oi.
Evil, kaków, où, Tó.
Examine, éðeráčo, äoſa).
Except, TAffy, more emphat. TAñv
'ye.
Expect, Tpoorêokáo), 6, flora).
Extravagant assertion, intep;30-
Añ, fis, i.
Extreme, Éoxaros, m, ov.
F.
Fabricate (for one's self), TXáo-
oropat, Tropat, TAáoropat, trāaoré-
pumu, Tétraagplat.
Face, TpóoroTov, ov, Tó.
Fail, often expressed by the neg, oi,
or pañ.
Fall, Titto, Teoroúpal, étréorov, Trét-
Taoka; fall to one's lot, ytyvo-
dat. ; fall in with,
évrvyxávo, and ovvrvyxdvo w.
dat. ; fall under, ytyvouat év w.
dat. ; fall into the power of,
'ytyvoual émi w. dat. ; fall into
other hands, be alienated,
dNAorptóopat, oùpat.
Falsehoods, false things, revöſ,
Tá, fr. ºbevöffs, és.
Falsely allege,
(kará, Weißopal).
Familiar conversations, orvyov-
plat (0.
karaveſ&opal
oria, as, i.
Fated, Terpopuévos, m, ov.
Favor, to receive a favor, e3
tráoyo; to do a favor, eú
trouéo, 6.
Fear, pogoûpal spoken of sudden
and inconsiderate fear; 8éôot-
ka, 6éöta, of deliberate and
reasonable fear; as subst. p3-
Bos, ov, 6.
Fellowship, kolvøvia, as, j.
Few, ÖAiyot, au, a.
Fight, pláxopal, paxoſpat, Šuaxegå-
pumv pepdxmpat; fight in a naval
engagement, vavpaxéo, 6, floo
(vais, pláxm).
Find, eipioſko, eúpñoro, eúpov and
měpov, eúpmka, eúpmual, eúpéðmu.
All the augmented tenses may
begin with mi-.
First, trpáros, m, ov; first (of
two persons), Tpórepos, a, ov;
to be first, Tporeño, eúoro; at
first éé àpxms.
ENGLISH-GREEK vocaBULARY,
137
Flee, beiyo, ºpečopiat or bevéoù-
pai, Éq}vyov, Trépévya.
Food, giros, ov, 6.
Foolish, eúñóms, es.
Foot, trows, Troöös, 6; on foot, Treff.
For, in behalf of itép w. gen.
Forbid, diróqmput, aor.
(diró, ºpmui).
Foreknow ; see Know.
Poretell, irpoxéyo (Tpé, Aéyò).
direitrov
Forget, ČiriNav6ávopal (éri, Xav6á-
vopal, Ajgopal, éAa66pmv, Att.
prose étréAa6ópmv).
Formerly, trpórepov.
Forsooth, 676ev.
Fortunate, eitvXàs, és; eibaiuov, ,
eijóaupou.
Free, éAejóspos, a, ov; autono-
mous, airóvopos, ov.
Freeman, éAeë6epos, ov, 3.
Friend, pi\os, ov, 6.
Full, TAñpms, es, w, gen.
G.
Glory (verb), āyāA\opal; act.
dyá\\o, to adorn.
Go in, eigépxopat, f eigeupt (eis,
eiut), imperf eioſijetv, and eigia;
go away, dirépxoplat.
Good-will, eúvota, as, ii.
Grandly, pleya)\oſpetrós.
Grant, give, 6tóopt, 8600, €60kg,
ôéðaka, 8éöopat, €866mu.
Great, pºéyas, pleyá\m, puéya; comp.
getőov; sup, pèytotos; so great,
Tooroútos, n, ov).
Greater numbers, TAetoves or
TAetovs.
Greek, "EX\mu, os, 6; as adj.
‘EA\mvikós, #, 6v.
Grief, Ajm, ms, i.
Guard against, bu)\ártopal w, acc.
Guest, Éévos, ov, 6.
Guide, #yepiſov, Övos, 6.
H. &
Habit, #60s, ovs, rö.
Hand, Xeip, Xelpós, #.
Happen, orvpſ3atva); what has
happened, Tà oup6ávra; to
happen, to chance, rvyxávo,
Tetéopal, érvXov, Tetºxmka.
Happy, prosperous, eúðatuov,
eißaipov (eſſ, 8aipov); to count
happy, eiðapovićo, too, tá. .
Haste, hasten, to be in haste,
Hate, pivoréa), 6, fioſo.
Have, hold, Éxo, Śo, or oxhoro,
éoxov, foxmka, Éoxmpal, éoxéðmu.
Have conquered, ann victori-
ous over, vukó (ào).
Have wronged, injured, dēt-
kéo, 6. -
Head, keba)\ff, ſ,s, i.
Hear, droëo drovoſopat, late drow-
oro. #kovora, dzākoa, jkovopal late,
hkoč06mv.
f sº
oteijóo, -orgo, Éo Trevora, Éa Trevka
(late), Éortſevo plat.
Help on, êváyo, -śa (€v, &yo).
138
PNGIISH – GREEK VOCAEUT.A.R.Y.
Herald, knpvč, vkos, 6.
Hinder, kao)\}o, Úora); be in the
way of épitoööv w. sivat ea:-
pressed or understood.
Hire, wages, plug 66s, où, 6; for
hire, puto 600; to hire, puto 660-
pat, oùpat, 60 opat.
Hireling, puto 660tós, où, 6.
Hither, Öeopo.
Hold; see Have.
Home, towards home, otizače; at
home, oikov; from home, oikoffev.
Honor, tupiñ, fis, j; to honor,
Tupéo, 6, -ão'o. -
Honorable, KaNés, ſi, Ču.
Horse, itritos, ov, 6.
Horseman, itTets, écos, 6.
How 2 Tós; how, as relat, adv.
às; how much 2 Tógos, m, ov;
in plur. how many?
However, puévrot.
Humor, to be in ill-humor,
ôvoxepaivo.
I.
I, §yó ; I for my part, I at least,
éyòye.
If, ei w, indic. or optat. : éâv (#v,
āv) w. Subjunc.
Ill, badly, kakós.
Immediately, aitika.
Impassable, döövatos 8tašºvat.
Impeachment, eig'ayye) ia, as, j.
Impend, étraptăopat, Öpiat, floropat.
Incomplete, drºńs, és.
Incorrigible, to be incorrigible,
éxetv dutdros.
Indict, ypáqopat, -\rouat (ypáqo,
ypávo, #ypava, yéypaqa, yā-
ypappal, éypáq6mu, Éypápmu.)
Indictment, ypaqº, ns, i.
Indigence, Évêeva, as, i.
Inflict, €truttömput.
Initiated, to be initiated, TeXéo-
pat, oùpat, teNégopal, oùpal, teré-
Neopat, Érexéorèmv.
Injustice, döukia, as, j; an un-
just act, döikmua, atos, Tó.
Insult, treat with insolence,
$8piſo, öðptoro or ü8ptó, ú8puaa,
£8puka, §§ptopau, ü8pio-émv.
Intend, 8tavoéopat, oùpat, floro-
plat.
Involved, to be involved in,
Tpooréxopal w, dat.
J.
Jest, Taíſo, Taíšo, traičopiat and Judge, or juror, 8tkao Tſis, où, 6.
* J/ f
Tatéoùpal, étrauga, Tétrauka later
Tétratxa, Tétratapat laſer Tétraty-
paw, Étraixòmu; to speak in jest,
Aéyetv Taišov.
Just, Öikatos, a, ov; justly, Śukaios;
just as, 60 Tep.
ENGLISH – GREEK VOCABULARY.
139
K.
Keep (a peace), áyo (eipſiumv).
Keep off, direpüka (diró, epiko,
épúča), #pvča); in keeping with,
Tpós w. gen.
King, 3aot)\ews, écos, 6; to be
king, 8a0t)\eta); aor, to be-
Come king.
Knee, yövv, aros, Tó.
Know, oióa, eigopal; 'ytyvö0 ko,
'yvóoropaw, Éyvou, Éyvoka, Éyvoor-
pal, éyvó0.6mu; not to know,
dyvoéo, ö, flora); foreknow,
Tpóotöa.
L.
Labor, Tóvos, ov, 6.
Language, povň, fis, i.
Large, pºéyas, pleyáAm, piéya.
Law, vópos, ov, 6; lawsuit, Öikm,
ms, i. *
Lay claim, détéo, ö, -óoro.
Lead, dyo, äéo, #yayov, fixa, fiypiat,
#xómy; lead against, àyo, Štri
20. (LCC.
Leave, Neitro, Neiyao, ÉNitrov, AéNot-
tra, AéNeuppat, €Neighönv; those
who are left, oi Noirot, ai, 4;
leave, allow, Šáo), 6, dora).
Left, Nowrós, h, śv; the part left,
Tô TriNeutrópºevov; left, as Op-
posed to right, dpurrepôs, d, 6v.
Let go, dºpimut (diró, imput).
Liberty, Nev6epia, as, i.
Lie, keipial, keto-opat.
Lighten, dotpárto, -\ro.
Like, similar, Šuovos, a, ov; in
like manner, Öpioios.
Like to, expressed by jöéos (gladly),
and the optat. w. &v.
Line of battle, páAayé, yos, ).
Linger; see Wait.
Listen to, drowo w, gem. Or acc.
Little, not a little, oix #kiqta.
Live, be alive, Čáo, 6, flora).
Look, (3)\étro, lºo, and lºopiat,
<ākrºn- 8é8)\eqa, 8é8)\eppat,
é8)\éq6mv.
Look-at-attentively, okotréa), 6,
aſkéyopat, €o keyrāpumu.
Long (adv.), long ago, TáNat.
Longer, yet, still, étu ; no longer,
oùkéta, punkéti (also written sepa-
rately, oùk étu : pº)... Ért, piñó’
€rt).
Lost, to be lost, diróAAvpal.
Loth, to be loth, ēkvéo, ö,
àgo.
Lucky, fortunate, eúðaipov, eú-
ôaupov.
TVI.
Make, Totéo, ö, horo; make for
one's self, the mid. --
Man, human being, àvôpoſtos;
Lat. vir, duhp, dvöpós, ò.
Manifest, 87Wos, m, ov.
Many, ToMAoi, ai, d.
March, tropečopat dep, pass. ;
march against, Topetopal étri
QU, CICC.
140
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
Master, köptos, ov, 6; as adj. kū-
ptos, ia, tow, w, gen.
Measure; see Deed.
Meet with, ovyytyvopal w. dal.
Mention, make mention of,
remember, uépumpat.
Midst, in the midst of, petašč.
Midwinter, pºéoros Xelpidov.
Might, oréévos, ovs, Tó; with all
one's might, travri orðével.
Mind and heart, vods kai ºppéves;
mind, thought, Suávota, as, i.
Mischief, kaków, où, Tó.
Misunderstanding, dyvapooijun.
Mix (by rubbing or bruising), Tpt-
80.
Mix a bowl (of wine), sparmptºo.
Money, Xpſipata.
Monition, sign, ormpletov, ov, Tó.
Month, piñv, pumvös, Ö.
Most, TAetortot, sup. of Toxts; the
most, the many, oi ToMAoi.
Most, greatest, especially, pºé-
yarov; for the most part, rö
TNeto Tov.
Mother, piñtmp, Tpós, i.
Much, so much, Toorooros, ro-
oraúrm, too otto(u).
N.
Narrowly, a little, pukpóv.
Nature, būaws, eas, i.
Near, éyyús.
Necessary, unavoidable, dvay-
kaios, a, ov; an unavoidable
necessity, diváykm, ms, j; it is
necessary, Öet, Xpñ.
Need; see Ask.
Neglect, TapapeNéao, ö, floo w.
gen, ÉNAeitro, -ko (év, Aetto).
Never, oùTote, piñTote, où8étrote,
plmöétrore; never up to the
present time, oùöetróTote, pºm-
§etróTore.
Nevertheless, àpos, où pºv dºd.
New (in kind), katvös, #, 6v; new
(but not in kind), véos, a, ov.
Noble, yeuvatos, a, ov; Xpmarós, h,
év; adv, yeuvaios. *
Noise (shouting or calling),
Kpavyń, fis, i.
INo longer; see Longer.
No one, oùöets, pumöets; more em-
phat, oùóē eis, plmöé eis.
Not, où, oëk, oix; puff; not a little,
oix #kuota.
Nourish, Tpédia), 6péra, ÉÉpera,
Tétpopa, Téépappal, éépéq6mv,
oftener étpáqmu.
Now, vöv; as temporal and illative,
vöv, Šh; now again, Ö) TáAuv.
Nowhere, oùöapoo, or sometimes
oùöapan.
Numberless, pavpiot, tat, ia.
O.
Oath, ēpkos, ov, 6.
Object, it is an object, tripleAés
eo Tv (v).
Observe, 6eopéo, ö, ägo.
Offend, cause pain to, AvTéo, ö,
ñoro, w, acc.
ENGLISH – GREEK VOCAEULA.R.Y.
141
Offer, 8tóopu in pres. and imperf.
Often, Tro)\\ákus.
Old, trpeggütns, ov, 6; subst, or adj.
Only, pºvov.
Open, dvotyvvut, divotyo, later divot-
'yvöo, ävoića), ávépéa, rare dvé-
gypal, dveđxómu.
Opinion, 66%a; itóAmbus, eas, fi;
to be of an opinion, Îyéopat,
otpat, vopuiço.
Oppose, évavrudo, ö, Öoo.
Opposed to, evavrudopau, -oopau,
-óoroplat.
Orator, fiftop, opos, 6; divip fiftop.
Order, kexeča), ke?\eſſora), áké\evora,
kekéAevka, kekéNevapal, ékéAeë-
orðmu.
Other, àNAos, m, o, Érepos, a, o,
otherwise, àA\os.
Ought, it is necessary, Öeſ, Xpſ.
Overcome; see Break.
Own, personal, tatos, ióta, tàtov.
P.
Pass by, omit, trans. Tapa)\eiro
(trapá, Neitro).
Pay, pug 66s, où, 6; receive pay,
pua 6apvéo, 6, flora).
Peace, eipſium, ms, j.
Penalty, a fine, Čmputa; punish-
ment, Tupopia, as, i.
Perform, Tpátro, Šo; Trotéo, ö).
Perish, diróAoAa, pf, 2, of diróA\vpu.
Permanent, 8é8atos, ata, atov.
Permit, Éiritpétro (éri, Tpétro).
Persuade, Tetéo, Tetoro, äreiga,
Tétrelka and Trétotôa (intrans.
and pres. I trust), Tétrelopat,
€Teio 6mu; in the pres. and imperf.
often, try to persuade.
Persuasion, to change one's
opinion by persuasion, peta-
Teiða w, acc. of pers. (uetá,
Treiða).
Philip, pixwºrtros, ov, 6.
Philosopher, q,w}\60ſoqbos, ov, 6;
to be a philosopher, pi\ogo-
q}éo, ö; aor, to become a phi-
losopher; those who are pur-
suing philosophy, oi (pi\ooro-
qoëvres.
Physician, iaTpós, où, 6.
Plain, Ömºos, m, ov; bavépós, d, Öv;
make plain, Öm)\óa), 6), Öoro;
plainly, ÖffWos, often expressed
by ‘paivopat.
Plan, Tpoaipeous, eas, j; to plan,
BovXeūopat.
Pleased, to be pleased, jöopat,
#0.6%gopal, jo.6mv.
Poison, qiāppakov, ov, Tó.
Political act, Toxtreupta, aros, Tó.
Pollution, &yos, ovs, Tó.
Poor, a poor man, Trévms, -ntos,
subst, or adj.
Position (in a line), rank, tdćts,
eos, i.
Possess, see Have; kékrmual, pſ.
of Kráopiat.
Rossible, it is possible, éott (v),
évéott, Évº; was possible, fiv,
eviv.
Pour in, Éyxéo (€v, Xéo).
Power, Šávapus, eas, j; to have
142
ENGLISH-GREEK WOCABULARY,
power, Šávapai; in the power
of, dependent upon, êtri w.dat.
Powerful, Öelvös, Ö, 6v.
Practically, in deed, Épy?, dat.
of épyov.
Practise, do, Touéo, 6.
Praise, étrauvéo, ö, ätrauvéoo, usu.
étrauwégopal, éirijvega, Éirfiveka,
&Tijumpal, éirmvéðmu.
Prevent; see Hinder.
Primarily, Tpótov.
Prison, Öeopotſipuov, ov, Tó.
Private man, ièuárms, ov, 6.
Privateer, Amaths, où, 6.
Proceed-step-by-step,
too, tá).
Proclaim, say beforehand, Tpó-
qmput (Tpſ, bmpt).
Profit, to be profitable, \vorite-
Aéo, ö, äoro; a vpºpépo (orów, ºpé-
po); that which is profitable
to, tú orvpaq Épov.
8ačićo,
Proper, it is proper, Xpſ.
Propose, Tpotíðmut.
Prosecuted, to be prosecuted,
to be put on trial (as a law
term), ºpečyco, or more fully ypaqīv
get yo.
Prosecutor, Ó Suðkaov, ovros.
Proud, to be proud, oreputyopat,
otpat.
Provisions, étruthèeta, ov, Tá.
Public, koupés, ſi, Čv; public man,
ômpotukós, où, 6; belonging to
the people, §mpidotos, ia, wov.
Punish, Tiptopéo, ö, floo.
Punishment; see Suffer.
Purification, kaðappºds, où, 6.
Pursue, Štóko, Św, and £opat, €6t-
oča, Öeóioxa, Öeðiðypal (late),
€ötöxämu.
Put or place in, Évríðmput; put
out of the way, Škºroööv Tote-
to 6at.
Q.
Quick; see Sharp.
| Quickly, taxó, taxéos.
R.
Raise up, dvio tmpw (ävá, to Tmpt).
Rally, come together, ovvépxo-
pat; to rally beforehand, Tpo-
ećaviatapat (Tpd, duá, to Tmut),
w. pf plupf, and 2 aor. in the act.
ºnice. -
Bate, at any rate, yoov.
Read, dvaytyvögro (dvá, ytyvö0 ko).
Recover, diva)\apſºdvo.
Reflect, think, qipovéo, ö, -àgo.
Refute, éééAéyxo, £o; áiroMöopat.
Regard, Nóyos, ov, 6.
Rehearse, dTayyé\\0.
Release, dra)\\ayń, fis, i.
Remain, puévo, 6), reg.; remain
on, êtrupévo.
Remember, pºéuvmpat, uvno.6%go-
pat (uepºvſigopal, will bear in
mind), juvågønv.
Remiss, to be remiss, due \éo,
ô, floo.
Render, make, Totéo, ö, äoro.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
143
Reply, dirokpivopat, oùpat, direkpt-
vápmv, dirokékptpat.
Reproach, cast reproach, Övet-
8tºo, tà, late too, öveiðuora, Övel-
ôuka, late &vetóto 6mu; a KóTTa),
okóyo, Éakova, Éokoppal, éokó-
q6mv.
Reputable, détóAoyos, ov (āśtos,
\6Yos).
Reputation, 86&a, as, i.
Require; see Ask.
Resemble, éouka, éketv.
Responsible, airtos, ta, tow, w,
gen.
Rest; see Lie.
| Restrain, Éméxo (éiri, Éxo); see
also Hinder.
River, Totapés, où, 6.
Robe, or dress up, in favn
skins, veðpiſo.
Rotten, oraëpós, ò, 6v.
Boyal, 8aat)\ukós, m, 6v.
IRuined, utterly ruined, ééóAms
kai trpodºms. -
Rule, àpxo, äpéo, fipča, fipxa, fipy-
pat, #px6mu.
Run, 6éo, 6600'opal, a rare word;
oftener Tpéxo, öpapotpat, #6pa-
pov, Šećpápmka; to run hastily,
ôpópºp 6etv.
S.
Safe, dorq,a)\ffs, és.
Safety, Gotmpia, as, i.
Sail, TAéo, TXeūgopal and TAev-
o'oùpal, ét)\evora, Tétrºevka, Té-
TXevopal, ét)\eſſorónv; sail away,
dToTAéo.
Sanction, nod assent to, Tu-
veðo.
Save, oróſo, oróoro, Égalora, oréorgo-
pat, usu. Oréologuat, aor, always
earáðmu; to come off in safety,
the pass. and mid.
Say, ‘pmui, photo, usu. Špé, aor.
eitrov or rare eitra, eipmka, eipmuai,
éppñómu.
School, school-room, Ötöao ka-
Neſov, ov, Tó.
Scream, kpáčo, kekpáčopal (rare),
kpášo (late), Ékpaša (rare and
late), Ékpayov (chiefly in com-
pos.), kékpaya (as pres.).
Search for, {mtéo, 6), moſa).
Seek; see above.
Seems, it seems, éouke(v); boket;
seems expedient, Öoke.
Seize and carry off, Öpiráčo,
àpirdoro, oftener épitäoropat, fipTa-
oa, ſpiraka, İpſagpat, ipTáo 6mu;
not Att. Öpitáša kté.
Sell, Tao)\éo, 6), f, dToë60 opat, aor.
direčápmy, pf Tétrpaka.
§end, Téutro, Tépºpo, Érepara, Té-
Topºpa, Tétreppat, Štrépiq,6mv.
Serve, ÚTmpetéco, ö, horo. -
Service, public service, \et-
Towpyta, as, j; to perform a
public service, Aetrovpyéo, ö).
Set, put, set down, Tíðmut, 6%a'a,
éðmka, Té6euka, Téðelpat, €réðmu;
set on foot, initiate, évío Tmput.
Share in, pietéxo (uetá, éxo) w.
gen.; share with, petaðiðajput
w. dat, and gen. of the thing
shared. -
144
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
Sharp, 6&s, sta, 6.
Sheep, Tpó8ata, ov, Tá.
Shout, 8odo, ö, ägo.
Show, Seikvvpu, Öeišo, betéa, Šá-
òetxa, 6éðetypal, éðeixónv.
Sick, the one who is sick, Ó
kápºvov.
Sit, káðmuaw; sit in attendance
on, Tpoorečpeūo Tpós w. dat.
Slander, 8Naqqºmuta, as, j.
Slave, duépáToôov, ov, Tó; 600Xos,
ov, 6. -
Slay, kill, dirokretva), ároktevão,
drékretva, dTéktova.
Slow, 8paôüs, eia, ć.
So, thus, oùtos; so that, Öote;
so and so, Tô kai Tó.
Sobriety, oroq pooróvm, ms, j (oré-
qipov, sober).
Socrates, Sokpárms, ovs, 6.
Soldier, otpattérms, ov, 6.
Some persons, fortivot; eioiu oi.
Somewhere, Troö (enclit.); w.gen.
somewhere within.
Sooner than, Tpó0.6ev Tpiv, Tpá-
Tepov Tpiv, or Tpiv alone.
Sophist, oroquotſis, où, 6; to play
the sophist, oroq iſopal.
Soul, lºvyń, fis, i.
Speak, Aéyo, Aééo, Neča, AéAey-
plau, ÉXéX&mu; speak ill of 3Aao-
ºpmuéo, ö, floo.
Speech, Adyos, ov, 6.
Speedy, taxás, eia (; speedily,
ev táxet; see Quickly.
Stand, pf plupf. 2 aor. and f. pf.
of to Tmut.
State, TóAts, eas, i.
Statesman, troXtrukós, où, 6.
Stay around; see Wait.
Steal, k\éTrao.
Still, yet, ætt.
Stone-to-death, karatretpdo, ö,
60 (o.
Stop, put a stop to, Traùo.
Strange, 6avpuaa Tós, #, 6v.
Strong, ioxupés, d, Öv; to be
strong, ioxico, ögo.
Submit one's self, trapéxo w. re-
flea. pron.
Successful, to be successful,
katop660, 9, 60 a.
Such, Totodros, totaúrm, totooro(v).
Suffer, Tráo Xo, Tetoroplaw, Étraffov,
Tétrov6a; suffer punishment,
give satisfaction, Štóóvat Sikmu;
suffer wrong, döukéopat, oùpat.
Sufficient, ikavós, ò, 6v.
Suggest, intopºpºvija ko (inté, pupivñ-
orko).
Suitable, éturſ, belos, a, ov; it is
suitable, Tpoorfirew.
Sunrise, at sunrise, ópa j\tº
dvaréA\ovrt.
Superior to, kpeirtov, Kpeſtrov,
w. gen.
Suppose, vopičo; #yéopat, oùpat;
otopat, or oiuat; into Mapſ3ávo.
Suspect, introTreća).
Suspicion, to view with sus-
picion, Öqopáopat, Öpiat.
Swallow down, karappoq’éo, ö,
moro.
Swerve from, dºpto-rapa w, gen.
verb. adj. diroo taréos.
Swift, taxis, eia, Ú.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
145
T.
Take, Aapſ3ávo, Añyopat, ÉNaßov,
etàmba, et\mupat, €Añºbômu; to
be taken or overtaken, äAtoſ-
kopiau, äAóoropat, Éd)\ov, and #Adov,
éáAdka; take back, dToMapuśā-
vo; take care, ºppovrićo, too,
wó; take the field, otpatetopau;
take place, yiyvoual; take up,
aipo, äpó, fipa, fipka, fippat, fipónu.
Tears, to shed tears, Šakpágo,-ora).
Terrible, Selvös, Ö, Öv.
Terrify, kirAfftro, kirAfféo, Šć-
TAméa, ćetrådymu.
Territory, Xópa, as, j.
Testimony, paptvpia, as, j. .
That or lest, after verbs of fear-
ing, piñ; that, as declarative con-
junc. 3rt, Ös; in order that,
iva, Štros, &s, too w. the infin.
Then, at that time, röre; then,
as correl. of éiretóñ, évraúða.
Thence, from thence, ékeiðev.
Therefore, toivvv, oëv, Öpa, Štótep,
ey
G)OTE. -
Things done, Tà Terpayuéva.
Think, otopat, oftener oiual, oiñoro-
pat, ºffémv; have in mind,
‘ppovéo, ö, äoro; think proper,
think worthy, dévôo, ö, Öoro.
This, oùros, airm, tooto; this man
here, oùToort.
Through, of time, the acc. case;
through, by means of, Suá w.
ClCC. -
Thunder, 8povráo, ö, -jord.
Thus, so, in that case, oùros.
Till; see Until.
Time, Xpóvos, ov, 6; favorable
or fitting time, kalpós, où, 6;
at the same time, àpia; the
coming time, 6 p.é\\ov aidºv.
To, into, eis; towards, éti, Tpás,
w, acc.; to, or into, the pres-
ence of, trapd w. acc.
Town, place, xoptov, ov, Tó.
Treasures, esp. money, Xprjuata,
drov, Tá.
Treat ill, kakós Troteiv.
Treaty, oſtrovöaí, ów, ai. Strictly,
libations as the sign of a treaty.
True, d\móñs, és.
Truth, d\ſióeta, as, j; true things,
Tā āXmóñ; to tell, speak the
truth, to report truly, d\m-
6eūo, -ečgo. • *,
Try, Treupdoplat. Ópat, Teipágoua,
late Telpatholopal, éirelpagápmy
and étrelpáðmu, Tetreipapal.
Turn, Tpétro, Tpéya), árpeya, Té-
Tpopa, térpappat, €rpéq6mv; 2.
aor. Érpármy usu. as mid. intrans.;
to turn out well, eú ytyvouai.
TJ.
Unavoidable, something una-
voidable, dváykm, ms, i.
TJnblushing, shameless,
dºxvvros, ov.
3 y
CI]/CIL-
Understand, étrio rapal, étuorrijoro-
plat, hºrio Tijónv.
Ungraceful, dxáploros, ov (a priv.
Xápts).
146
ENGLISH – GREEK VOCABULARY.
TJnion, fellowship, kowovia,
as, i.
TJnjust towards, #6tkos Tepi
w. acc. ; to be unjust, to
act unjustly, dölkéo, ö, jago;
an unjust act, döikmpa, aros,
Tó.
Unless, éâv puff w. Subjunc.; ei
pur, w, indic. or optat.
TJnnoticed, pass unnoticed,
dyvoéopal, oßplat, jo'opiat.
Unpleasant, Övoxepſis, és.
Unrewarded, dxáptortos, ov.
Until, écos, Éote, pºéxpt; Tpiv (usu.
after negative sentence).
Use, Xpáopal, &pal, Xpija'opal, éxpm-
orápmv, kéxpmual.
Utter; see Speak.
V.
Victorious, to be victorious || Voice, ºpovij, fis, #.
over, vukáo, ö, ägo, w, acc.
Visit, go to, eigeup, w, dat. (eis,
eiut).
Voiceless, silent, àqovos, ov.
Voluntarily, Šköv eival; pl. Ékóvres
eival.
W.
Wait, diréxo (ért, #xo); linger,
stay on, dvapiévo; stay around,
treptpévo.
Want, #vöeta, as, j.
War, tróNepos, ov, 6; to carry
on war, ToMeptéo, 6, joid.
Water, $60p, aros, Tó.
Way, in the way of éptroööv;
in no way, oùöapiós.
Wearied out, am wearied out,
y
direipmka.
Weep, bewail, k\ato, k\aúoropat,
rare k\avoroúpat, k\aliforo, and
KAaſoo, k\avaa, kākāavpal and
later kék\avopal, late ék\aúa 6my.
Trans. or wmīrams.
Well, e3; well, honorably, ka-
Aós.
When, in the sense after, étrévôň,
w.subjunc. &metódv; at the time
when, Öre, w. Subjunc. §rav; at
the exact time when, jvika,
w. Subjunc. jvíka čv.
Where, šv6a; the very place
where, šv6a 3%.
While, as long as, £os (chiefly w.
pr. indic.). -
Whip, to whip, to flay, 8épo,
òepô, Éöelpa, 8éðappat, €86pmv.
Who, what, rts, Tí; what sort
of, Troios, a, ov; of what sort,
oios, a, ov.
Will; see Wish.
Willing, to be willing, £6é\co,
é6eXſjord, #6é\mora, #6&Amka.
Wipe off, dropätto, $6.
Wish, want, 800Xopat, 8ov\fforo-
pat, 8egoûAmual, é8ovXſjömu, and
#8ov\ijómy; want, to be in
need of, ask for, 8éopal, Öefforo-
ENGLISH – GREEK VOCABULARY.
147
pal, late 8emóñoopal, Öeóémpat,
eóeijónv.
With, often expressed by a parti-
cip., as éxov; by the side of,
trapá w. dat. ; in company
with, orév w, dat, ; participat-
ing with, pierd w. gen.
Withdraw, dira)\\áttopat, Šopal
(dTó, d\\dtro).
Without food, &ottos, ov (a priv.
oritos wheat).
Without sense, dvömros, ov (a
priv. vows). *
Wolf, Nükos, ov, 6.
Wonder, wonder at, 6avpd{o,
Y.
Yet, nevertheless, àuos; yet,
still, étu; yet, up to this time,
Tró (enclit.).
Yield to, obey, Tetêopal.
6avpido'opiat éðaðuaga, teffaipaka,
Te6aúpagpal, éðavpdorémv.
Word, voice, povň, fis, j.
Worsted, to be worsted, pelov
éxeuv.
Worthy, &évos, ta, toy; worthily,
détos; deem worthy, détéo,
6, Óora), w. gen.
Wrangle, 8takpivo (Štá, kptvo).
Wretched, 36Auos, a, ov, also os, ov;
in a wretched manner, d6Xtas.
Write, to write a resolution,
ypábo, -lºgo.
Wrong, to do wrong, döukégo, ö,
-joo.
Young man, weaviorkos, ov, 6; the
youth, the younger men, oi
veóTepot.
Z.
Zealously, Tpo6ápos; to unite in helping zealously, orvatovčáčo,
Af
*CIO Gº),
WALUABLE GREEK B00KS
puſ BLISHED BY
S. C. GRIGGS AND COMPANY,
CHICAGO.
** No better exercises can be found for classes in Greek Prose Compo-
sition, whether in College or the Preparatory School.”— EDWARD
NORTH, L. H. D., Professor of Greek, Hamilton College, N. Y.
JONES's EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSI-
TION.—With References to Hadley’s, Goodwin’s, and Taylor's-Kühner’s Greek Gram-
mars, and a full English-Greek Vocabulary. Part I. By ELISHA Jon ES, M. A., late
Professor of Greek, University of Michigan, (now of Germany.) Price, $1.25.
Extracts from the Preface : “These exercises in prose composition are designed
for a systematic drill in the more important principles of Greek Syntax. . . . . They
are also intended to accompany the reading of Xenophon’s Anabasis, from Which are
taken all of the vocabularies and nearly all the examples. Wherever practicable the
exercises themselves are so framed that, with the use of the Anabasis, Xenophon's
style may be imitated in turning them into Greek. To aid in securing thoroughness, each
exercise after the fourteenth not only comprises the principles referred to in its own lesson,
but also reviews those in at least two of the preceding. The purpose of this repetition, ne-
cessary for the young student, is to make him so familiar with the principal peculiarities
of Greek construction, that he may be able to appreciate somewhat the beauties of Xeno-
phon, and also better prepared to enter upon a more advanced study of the language.
“It is believed that Part I. contains sufficient work in prose composition for admission to
any American college.”
SEQUEL TO THE ABOVE, or
Part II. EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. By JAMEs R.
BoISE, Ph.D., for the use of Freshman Classes. Price, $1.50.
OPINIONS OF CLASSICAL SCHOLARS.
J. B. Sewall, Prof. of Ancient Lang., Bowdoin. Cº. Me...: “‘Mr. Jones’s Exercises *
I have been waiting for with impatience. . . . . I shall have this required for admission
here. I am grateful to you for giving students such beautiful pages to study from.
A. Huelster, Ph. D., Prof. of Greek, Northwestern College, Ill.: “The ‘Exercises
in Greek Prose Cómposition by Prof. Jones,’ are superlatively excellent. They enable
preparatory students to master Greek syntax with comparative ease, and are a model of ac-
Curacy and conciseness.” sº
Rev. W. S. Tyler, D. D., Prof. of Greek, Amherst College, Mass.: “I am much
pleased with Exercises in Greek Prose Composition’ by Prof. Jones. It has the merit
of great simplicity and clearness. It comprehends a great deal for so small a book. I shall
have no hesitation in recommending it highly for a preparatory book.”
Rev. Thomas W. Tobey, A. M., Prof. of Greek, Bethel College, Ky. : “AN ExCEED-
INGLY valuable book, ably and carefully prepared and well adapted to the purpose for which
it was made. Let the TEACHERS in our land UNDERSTAND ITS MERITs, and you will have
for it a MOST ExTENSIVE CIRCULATION.”
B. L. Cilley, Prof. of Ancient Languages, Phillip’s Eveter Academy, W. H. : “I find
#. *Works weſi. It seems better adapted to its purpose than any book else which I have
HOUIIAOl.
MAILED, POSTAGE PAID, ON RECEIPT OF PRICE.
Publications of S. C. Griggs & Co., Chicago.
BoISE. –FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. — Adapted to Hadley's
Larger and Smaller Greek Grammars, and intended as an Introduction for Xenophon's
Anabasis. By JAMES R. BOISE, Ph. D., Prof. of Greek Language and Lit., University
of Chicago. Price, $1.25.
Prof. N. L. Andrews, Madison University, N. Y.: “Your ‘First Lessons in Greek” is
capital. It will, I am Sure, have no competitor among those who use Hadley’s Grammars.”
Ira W. Pettibone, M. A., Beloit College, Wisconsin : “I am perfectly delighted with
your ‘Greek Lessons.’ My class, after two terms Spent upon it, are reading the Anabasis, I
think, quite as easily as after a year spent upon another introductory book.”
C. W. Guernsey, Russell's Collegiate Institute, New Haven, Coºn. : “I find Prof.
Boise’s “Greek Lessons’ wellnigh invaluable in my classes.”
BOISE. — HOMIER'S IT,IAD. — The First Six Books of Homer’s
Iliad, with Explanatory Notes intended for Beginners in the Epic Dialect; accompa-
nied with numerous References to Hadley’s Greek Grammar, to Kuhner's Larger
Greek Grammar, and Goodwin’s Moods and Tenses. By JAMEs R. BoISE, of the Uni-
versity of Chicago. Price, $1.75.
M. L. D’Ooge, Prof. of Greek, University of Michigan: “Incomparably superior to
any other edition of Homer ever published in this country.”
W. W., Goodwin, Prof. of Greek, Harvard University : “It is a most valuable con-
º,” classical learning, and I trust it will have alſ the success it most certainly
€Sel’VeS. *
W. S. Tyler, D.D., IL. D., Prof. of Greek, Amherst College: “I find the Notes just
what I expected, - the right kind in the right places. I am particularly struck with the
fulness, and yet the brevity and correctness, of the grammatical references and illustrations.”
sºsºsºmºs
BOISE & FREEMAN, - SELECTIONS FROM VARIOUS
GREEE AUTHORS. — For the first year in College, with Explanatory Notes,
and References to Goodwin’s Greek Grammar, and to Hadley’s Larger and Smaller
Grammars. By JAMEs R. BoISE, Ph. D., and JoHN C. FREEMAN, M.A., Professors in
the University of Chicago. Pages 393. Price, $2.50. sº
Extract from the Preface : “In the preparation of this work two objects
have been aimed at, — a comprehensive view of the Greek Language in its principal
forms, and a general survey of the leading event ; in the history of the Greeks. The authors,
as well as théevents of which they write, are arranged in the chronological order.”
N. L. Andrews, Prof. of the Greek Language and Literature, Madison University :
“Boise’s ‘Selections from Greek Authors' fulfils the expectations excited by his former
works, and is admirably adapted to the purposes set forth in the Preface. 'ſ he interesting
portions so judiciously chosen from various authors; the notes, calculated as they are to
encourage the student to do his own work by wisely lessening its difficulties; and the refer-
ences to Goodwin’s and Hadley’s Grammars, combine to recommend the book. ITS USE for
a TERMI PAST with Our Freshman Class HAS T ENDED to INCREASE MY APPRECIATION Of its
MEGITS. Typographically, the book is simply beautiful, - a delight to the eye.”
George R. Bliss, Prof. of Latin and Greek, Lewisburg University, Pa.; “I have ex-
amined this work somewhat carefully, and am so persuaded of its excellence that I have
decided to adopt it with my classes in the Freshman year.”
Rev. Jacob Cooper, D. C. L., Prof. of Greek, Rutger's College, N. J.: “After a care-
ful examination of the ‘Selections,” I am satisfied that this book MEETS A REAL WANT IN
COLLEGE. . . . . The copious notes and references appear to be all that could be desired.
'ſ hey show excellent taste in explaining the difficult rather than the easy passages, and give
references to such authorities as the student could be expected to possess. In typography
and neatness this book is a model of its kind. I have introduced it in our collegiate
COUTS0.
A. H. Buck, Prof. of Greek, Boston University: “I found the book so admirable in the
matter selected, in the soundness and accuracy of the annotations, and in the unusual
excellence of the press-work, that I could do no otherwise than urge its adoption for the
#. class in the college, and my high opinion of the book has been corroborated by
ally use.
MAILED, POSTAGE PAID, ON RECEIPT OF PRICE.
|||||||||||
DD NOT REMOVE
0R
M|T|LATE [. ARD

¿¿.
： ·•¿?
*** （3.№
& &*）*）
¿
ſ., &
Ķēs，-ſae;。、、、、、、）* Aſaeº - º ！... º. º...&.** ·„…;-）））--| ...…..….：ſ （ ）'： * * · ·.- ·· ·∞; ： ！………… . . . .
š， *ī ， ， ***§:*ae----- ：·- *، ----·， ，.&.ſae*：）*）*）**
| ~ ~ （ſººſ§§ſae*-*...*… ：-）--º--：. . . . . . . . . .c' .º , ， ，''）;~ ،：-· º .* . . . . .----ſae###™Ě，
§. ***§ *） ） * **: ， •
· s - … .…. », sae … * * * *， es
№aeae.
Q|-
-·，* * * * · * * * ·º £
،- , : ， ; £|-* 3 ** * · · · ·：ſº. №}
g§ . . ≤ ∞ &s ≡ （， ， ，* ¿
$№，...，* * · · *